Huawei NetEngine80E Configuration Manual - Reliability
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Huawei Manuals
  4. Network Router
  5. Quidway NetEngine80E
  6. Configuration manual - reliability
Huawei NetEngine80E Configuration Manual - Reliability

Huawei NetEngine80E Configuration Manual - Reliability

Hide thumbs Also See for NetEngine80E:
1
2
3
4
5
Table Of Contents
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Configuration Manual
HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router
V600R008C10
Configuration Guide - Reliability
Issue
02
Date
2014-09-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Huawei NetEngine80E

Summary of Contents for Huawei NetEngine80E

  • Page 1 HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router V600R008C10 Configuration Guide - Reliability Issue Date 2014-09-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
  • Page 2 All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope.

  • Page 3: About This Document

    This document is intended for: Commissioning Engineer Data Configuration Engineer Network Monitoring Engineer System Maintenance Engineer Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 4: Command Conventions

    [ x | y | ... ] vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected. &<1-n> The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n times. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 5 Changes in Issue 02 (2014-09-30) This issue is the second official release. Changes in Issue 01 (2014-06-30) This issue is the first official release. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 6: Table Of Contents

    2.2.2 Configuring a Standby Interface..........................18 2.2.3 Configuring the Active/Standby Switchover Delay....................19 2.2.4 Checking the Configurations.............................19 2.3 Configuring the Load Balancing Interface Backup......................20 2.3.1 Before You Start................................20 2.3.2 Configuring a Standby Interface..........................21 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 7 4.1.2 VRRP Features That the NE80E/40E Supports......................112 4.2 Configuring Basic Functions of a VRRP IPv4 Backup Group..................116 4.2.1 Before You Start..............................116 4.2.2 Creating a VRRP Backup Group..........................118 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 8 4.9.3 Binding a Service VRRP IPv6 Backup Group to an mVRRP IPv6 Backup Group..........168 4.9.4 Checking the Configurations...........................169 4.10 Configuring VRRP IPv6 Association........................170 4.10.1 Before You Start..............................170 4.10.2 Associating a VRRP IPv6 Backup Group with a VRRP-Disabled Interface............171 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 9 5.5 Configuring the Association Between the BFD Status and the Sub-Interface Status..........333 5.5.1 Before You Start..............................334 5.5.2 Configuring the Association Between BFD Status and Sub-Interface Status............334 5.5.3 Checking the Configurations...........................335 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 10 5.13.3 Checking the Configurations..........................361 5.14 Configuring the Interval for Trap Messages Are Sent....................362 5.14.1 Before You Start..............................362 5.14.2 Configuring the Interval at Which Trap Messages Are Sent.................363 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 11 6.4 Configuration Examples.............................451 6.4.1 Example for Configuring the System-Level GR.....................451 7 NSR Configuration........................456 7.1 NSR Overview................................457 7.1.1 Introduction................................457 7.1.2 NSR Features Supported by the NE80E/40E......................459 7.2 Configuring NSR................................460 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 12 8.4.4 Configuring Y.1731 Functions in VLAN Networking....................799 8.4.5 Clearing Y.1731 Statistics............................816 8.4.6 Deleting Y.1731 ETH-Test Statistics........................817 8.4.7 Configuration Examples............................817 9 MPLS-TP OAM Configuration....................914 9.1 Introduction................................915 9.1.1 MPLS-TP OAM Overview............................915 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 13 9.7.2 Example for Configuring LB for an LSP........................962 9.7.3 Example for Configuring LM for an LSP.......................965 9.7.4 Example for Configuring DM for an LSP.......................969 9.7.5 Example for Configuring CC and CV for a PW......................973 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 14 11.3 Configuring Dual-Device ARP Hot Backup......................1144 11.3.1 Before You Start..............................1145 11.3.2 Configuring an RBP for ARP Service Backup....................1145 11.3.3 Binding the Remote Backup Profile to the Interface...................1146 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 15 11.8 Configuring Dual-System Backup for Distributed NAT Services.................1185 11.8.1 Before You Start..............................1186 11.8.2 Configuring Basic Distributed NAT Functions....................1187 11.8.3 Configuring Association Between NAT and BRAS Service Backup..............1187 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 16 12.5 HA Service Feature Configuration.........................1341 12.5.1 Before You Start..............................1341 12.5.2 Configuring Service Instances..........................1342 12.5.3 Configuring a Service Instance Group........................1343 12.5.4 Binding Service Instances to a Service Instance Group..................1343 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 17 12.6.7 Example for Configuring Inter-chassis HA Backup for VPN NAT Services in Centralized Deployment Scenarios ......................................1387 12.6.8 Example for Configuring HA Backup Between Two Indirectly Connected CGN Devices for the NAT Service (Distributed Deployment Mode)............................1402 A Glossary............................1411 B Acronyms and Abbreviations....................1414 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 18: Reliability Overview

    Reliability technologies for IP networks include failure detection technologies and protection switching technologies. 1.4 Networking of Reliability over an IP Network This section describes FRR applicable scenarios and FRR solutions. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 19: Introduction

    + Route coverage time + Forwarding recovery time The smaller the addends are, the smaller the MTTR is and the higher the availability a device offers. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 20: Levels Of Reliability Requirements

    1.1.4 Principles for High-Reliablity IP Networking Technologies for reliable networking cover the hierarchy networking, redundancy technology, and load balancing technology. The principles for high-reliablity IP networking are as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 21: Reliability Technologies For Ip Networks

    1.2.2 Protection Switching for IP Networks The standard time of protection switching on a data communication network is 50 ms. Link redundancy is a basis of protection switching. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 22: Reliability Technologies Supported By The Ne80E/40E

    Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) and a standby next hop is configured manually. When a failure occurs, the fast switchover is performed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 23 (including forwarding prefix, inner tag, and selected outer LSP tunnel), information about the inferior priority next hop (including forwarding prefix, inner tag, and selected outer LSP tunnel) are also contained in the forwarded entry. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 24: Oam (Operation Administration & Maintenance)

    When the gateway fails, the communication between hosts and external networks is interrupted. Figure 1-1 LAN default gateway Ethernet IP Address:10.0.0.2/24 Gateway:10.0.0.1 RouterA 10.0.0.1/24 Network Gateway:10.0.0.1 IP Address:10.0.0.3/24 Gateway:10.0.0.1 IP Address:10.0.0.4/24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 25: Bfd

    LDP FRR/TE FRR In LDP or TE FRR, when transmission devices exist between P devices, BFD or OAM can be used to detect links that transmit traffic. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 26: Link Failure During Transmission

    When the primary tunnel is Down and the bypass tunnel is available, the tunnel is iterated to the primary tunnel logically. In fact, the bypass tunnel, also named protection tunnel, works. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 27 If one end does not receive the detection packets within a specified period, the end assumes that the link is interrupted and reports to related modules to perform switchover. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 28: Failure On The Remote Pe - Vpn Frr

    PE3 and PE4. In this case, PE3 and PE4 serve as the backup for each other, through which PE1 sends packets. This is how VPN FRR works. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 29: Failure Of Downlink Interface On The Pe - Ip Frr

    Similarly, with IP FRR, two paths exist between PE1 and CE. For one path, packets are transmitted through direct route. For the other path, packets are transmitted from PE1 to PE2 and then forwarded to CE. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 30 Then, the private network neighbor relationship between PE1 and PE2 needs to be created, and the primary and bypass paths are created for PE1 accessing CE. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 31: Interface Backup Configuration

    2.5 Configuration Examples Interface backup is performed in active/standby mode or load balancing mode. Each configuration example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, and configuration roadmap. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 32: Introduction Of Interface Backup

    Any physical interface or sub-interface like Ethernet interface serves as an active interface on a router. An active interface with larger bandwidth provides a higher transmission rate. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 33: Characteristics Of The Interface Backup Supported By The Ne80E/40E

    When the data flow of the active interface reaches the specified upper limit, the router automatically enables an available standby interface with the highest priority. Both interfaces undertake the transmission together and share the load. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 34: Configuring The Active/Standby Interface Backup

    Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring the active/standby interface backup, complete the following tasks: Configure physical parameters for interfaces. Configure link layer attributes for interfaces. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 35: Configuring A Standby Interface

    Step 2 Run: interface interface-type interface-number The interface view is displayed. Step 3 Run: standby interface interface-type interface-number [ priority ] A standby interface and its priority are configured. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 36: Configuring The Active/Standby Switchover Delay

    When enable-delay and disable-delay are set to 0, the switching is performed immediately. ----End 2.2.4 Checking the Configurations By viewing the status of the active and standby interfaces, you can check whether the configurations are successful. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 37: Configuring The Load Balancing Interface Backup

    The two parameters affect the service throughput on each interface. Meanwhile, the bandwidth of the active interface is preferentially used. Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring the load balancing interface backup, complete the following tasks: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 38: Configuring A Standby Interface

    The active interface view is displayed. Step 3 Run: standby interface interface-type interface-number [ priority ] A standby interface and its priority are configured. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 39: Configuring The Percentage Thresholds For Load Balancing

    2.3.4 (Optional) Configuring the Bandwidth and Flow Check Interval for the Active Interface You can set the bandwidth of the active interface and the interval for detecting traffic as required. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 40: Checking The Configurations

    ----End Example After the configuration, you can run the display standby flow command to check the flow statistics of the active interface working in load-balancing mode. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 41: Maintaining The Interface Backup

    2.5 Configuration Examples Interface backup is performed in active/standby mode or load balancing mode. Each configuration example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, and configuration roadmap. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 42: Example For Configuring The Active/Standby Mode Of Multiple Interfaces

    Configure POS 2/0/0 on Router B as the active interface to bear all the services. Configure POS 1/0/0 and POS 3/0/0 in the interface view of POS 2/0/0 as the standby interfaces without any service. POS 1/0/0 has a higher priority. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 43 10.20.1.1 (10.20.1.1), max hops: 30, packet length: 40, press CTRL_C to break 10.10.1.2 60 ms 60 ms 50 ms 10.1.2.2 50 ms 40 ms 70 ms 10.20.1.1 70 ms 70 ms 60 ms Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 44 10.10.1.2 255.255.255.0 ip route-static 10.20.1.0 255.255.255.0 Pos1/0/0 ip route-static 10.20.1.0 255.255.255.0 Pos2/0/0 ip route-static 10.20.1.0 255.255.255.0 Pos3/0/0 return Configuration file of Router B Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 45: Example For Configuring Load Balancing On Multiple Standby Interfaces

    When the traffic of the active interface reaches 50% of the threshold, the interface POS 1/0/0 is enabled for load balancing. Standby interfaces with low priority are disabled when the traffic of the active interface is less than 30% of the threshold. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 46 [RouterA] ip route-static 10.20.1.0 255.255.255.0 Pos3/0/0 # Configure a static route to Host A network segment on Router B. <RouterB> system-view [RouterB] ip route-static 10.10.1.0 255.255.255.0 pos1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 47 STANDBY STANDBY Backup-flag meaning: M---MAIN B---BACKUP V---MOVED U---USED D---LOAD P---PULLED G---LOGICCHANNEL <RouterB> display standby flow Interfacename : Pos2/0/0 Flow-interval(s) : 30 LastInOctets : 5298 LastOutOctets : 398807420 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 48 50 30 standby bandwidth 40000 interface Pos3/0/0 link-protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0 interface GigabitEthernet4/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 10.20.1.2 255.255.255.0 ip route-static 10.10.1.0 255.255.255.0 Pos1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 49 HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability 2 Interface Backup Configuration ip route-static 10.10.1.0 255.255.255.0 Pos2/0/0 ip route-static 10.10.1.0 255.255.255.0 Pos3/0/0 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 50: Aps Configuration

    3.5 Configuration Examples This section provides configuration examples of APS. Each configuration example consists of the networking requirements, configuration precautions, configuration roadmap, configuration procedures, and configuration files. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 51: Aps Overview

    Add/Drop Multiplex (ADM) or a Radio Network Controller (RNC) of an SDH network that has APS functions. Two APS-enabled routers can also protect traffic on direct links between them. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 52 (COO) signals for a traffic switchover; K2 transmits Changeover Acknowledgement (COA) signals for a traffic switchback. For information about meanings of K1 and K2 bytes, see the chapter "APS" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Feature Description - Reliability. APS Working Modes...

  • Page 53: Aps Features Supported By The Ne80E/40E

    APS switching mode. APS Working Modes Automatic protection switching Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 54 NE80E/40Es. The local NE80E/40E retains the E-APS connection during the configured hold time. If no negotiation message is received after the hold time expires, the local NE80E/40E considers the E-APS connection is torn down. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 55 3 APS Configuration PGP authentication string PGP is a Layer 3 Huawei proprietary protocol and operates over a UDP connection. PGP's default authentication mode is none. Messages transmitted in none authentication mode can be easily used to initiate attacks. To protect the NE80E/40E running PGP, an authentication string can be configured so that PGP messages are authenticated in simple text mode.

  • Page 56: Configuring Single-Device Aps

    3-3, PE2 and BSC (RNC) are connected by two CPOS links. You can configure CPOS 3/0/1 as a working interface, and CPOS 3/0/2 as a protection interface. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 57: Specifying A Working Interface And A Protect Interface For An Aps Group

    The protection interface takes over traffic after APS switching is performed. When an APS group works in 1+1 mode, both the working Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 58 Or, run: controller cpos cpos-number The interface view is displayed. Run: aps group group-id An APS group is created and an interface is added to the APS group. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 59: Configuring A Working Mode For An Aps Group

    One of the following modes can be configured: – one2one bidirection: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 60 In a single-chassis scenario, the switchback time must be the same on two APS devices. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 61: Adding Interfaces Of An Aps Group To A Trunk Interface

    The interface is added to a trunk interface. NOTICE The working and protection interfaces of an APS group must be added to the trunk interface with the same trunk ID. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 62: Checking The Configurations

    Inter-device APS switchback can be performed by configuring E-APS. 3.3.1 Before You Start Before configuring E-APS, familiarize yourself with the usage scenario, complete the pre- configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 63 IDs of the working and protection interfaces in an APS group (Optional) WTR time set for an APS group (Optional) Authentication string configured for the PGP message Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 64: Specifying A Working Interface And A Protect Interface For An Aps Group

    Or, run: controller cpos cpos-number The interface view is displayed. Run: aps group group-id An APS group is created and an interface is added to the APS group. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 65 An APS protection interface uses the K type in an APS packet to negotiate with the APS protection interface on the remote end. By default, the high-priority signal failure code for Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 66: Configuring A Working Mode For An Aps Group

    Perform the following steps on a protection interface in an APS group: Procedure Configure an automatic protection switching mode for an APS group. Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 67 The WTR time is set for the APS group. The value ranges from 1 to 12 minutes. When setting the WTR time, note the following items: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 68: Optional) Binding An Aps Group To A Bfd Session

    In an example, BFD is configured to track a working interface. This configuration is similar to the configuration for BFD to track a protection interface. The configuration procedure is as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 69: Optional) E-Aps Negotiation And Authentication Parameters

    If no negotiation message is received after the hold time expires, the local NE80E/40E considers the E-APS connection is torn down. PGP is a Layer 3 Huawei proprietary protocol and operates over a UDP connection. PGP's default authentication mode is none. Messages transmitted in none authentication mode can be easily used to initiate attacks.
  • Page 70 PGP message. PGP negotiation can only be performed successfully when the authentication strings configured on both working and protection interfaces are the same. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 71: Adding Interfaces Of An Aps Group To A Trunk Interface

    The interface is added to a trunk interface. NOTICE The working and protection interfaces of an APS group must be added to the trunk interface with the same trunk ID. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 72: Checking The Configurations

    <HUAWEI> display atm-trunk 1 Interface Atm-Trunk1's state information is: Operate status: up Number Of Up Port In Trunk: 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PortName Status Active Status Atm1/3/0 Active 3.4 Maintaining APS Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 73: Configure A Command-Triggered Switching Mode For An Aps Group

    – lockout: Initiates a locked APS request in an APS group, that is, locks traffic on the working link. – force: Initiates a forced APS request in an APS group, that is, forcibly switches traffic to the protection link. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 74: Configuration Examples

    E1 links needs to be configured as TDM. Finally, a PW needs to be set up between PE1 and PE2 to transparently transmit TDM cells. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 75 To complete the configuration, you need the following data: L2VC IDs at both ends of the PW (must be the same) MPLS LSR IDs of the PEs and P device Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 76 [PE1-T1 2/0/1] quit [PE1] controller T1 2/0/2 [PE1-T1 2/0/2] t1 2 channel-set 2 timeslot-list 0-23 [PE1-T1 2/0/2] quit Configure PE2. # Set parameters for the CPOS-Trunk interface on PE2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 77 1 command to view the CPOS-Trunk member interface status. CPOS 3/0/2 becomes Active. [PE2] display aps group 1 APS Group 1: Cpos 3/0/1 working channel 1(Inactive) Cpos3/0/2 protection channel 0(Active) Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 78 : 0 days, 0 hours, 39 minutes, 29 seconds VC last up time : 2008/12/26 12:02:49 VC total up time : 0 days, 4 hours, 02 minutes, 39 seconds Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 79 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 192.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 192.2.2.2 0.0.0.0 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 return Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 80 192.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 192.3.3.3 0.0.0.0 network 10.2.2.0 0.0.0.255 return Configuration file of P sysname P mpls lsr-id 192.4.4.4 mpls mpls ldp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 81: Example For Configuring Aps On A Cpos-Trunk

    In real-world situations, mid-range-and-low-end devices are usually connected to CPOS interfaces over a multi-layer transport network. Therefore, relay devices and other transport means are probably involved. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 82 [RouterA-Cpos1/0/0] aps group 1 [RouterA-Cpos1/0/0] aps working [RouterA-Cpos1/0/0] quit [RouterA] controller cpos 2/0/0 [RouterA-Cpos2/0/0] undo shutdown [RouterA-Cpos2/0/0] aps group 1 [RouterA-Cpos2/0/0] aps protect [RouterA-Cpos2/0/0] aps mode one-plus-one unidirection [RouterA-Cpos2/0/0] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 83 Cpos2/0/0 idle ------------------------------------------------------------------------ total entry: 1 # Run the display cpos-trunk command to view the CPOS-Trunk configuration. The command output shows the status of CPOS-Trunk member interfaces. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 84 2 unframed interface Global-Mp-Group0 undo shutdown interface Trunk-Serial0/1:0 undo shutdown link-protocol ppp ppp mp-global global-mp-group 0 interface Trunk-Serial0/2:0 undo shutdown link-protocol ppp ppp mp-global global-mp-group 0 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 85: Example For Associating Pw Redundancy With E-Aps Working In 1:1 Mode

    Configure primary and backup PWs on PE1 to be dual-homed to PE2 and PE3, configure common PWs on PE2 and PE3, and configure a bypass PW between PE2 and PE3. Configure a BFD session to detect a PW. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 86 [P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] isis enable 1 [P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] quit [P1] interface gigabitEthernet 3/0/2 [P1-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] isis enable 1 [P1-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] quit [P1] interface loopback 0 [P1-LoopBack0] isis enable 1 [P1-LoopBack0] quit # Configure P2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 87 [PE3-LoopBack0] quit Step 2 Configure MPLS TE. Configure MPLS TE. # Configure PE1. [PE1] interface loopBack 0 [PE1-LoopBack0] ip address 1.1.1.1 32 [PE1-LoopBack0] quit [PE1] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 88 [PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/2 [PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] mpls [PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] mpls te [PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] quit # Configure PE3. [PE3] interface loopBack 0 [PE3-LoopBack0] ip address 5.5.5.5 32 [PE3-LoopBack0] quit [PE3] mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 89 [PE1] tunnel-policy ct2 [PE1-tunnel-policy-ct2] tunnel select-seq cr-lsp load-balance-number 1 [PE1-tunnel-policy-ct2] quit # Configure PE2. [PE2] interface tunnel 1/0/0 [PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 [PE2-Tunnel1/0/0] tunnel-protocol mpls te Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 90 [CE2-Atm2/0/2] aps revert 5 [CE2-Atm2/0/2] quit Create an ATM-Trunk on PE2, PE3, and CE2 and add interfaces to the ATM-Trunk. # Configure PE2. [PE2] interface atm-trunk 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 91 [PE3-l2vpn] quit [PE3] pw-template pwt [PE3-pw-template-pwt] control-word [PE3-pw-template-pwt] quit [PE3] interface atm-trunk 1.1 p2p [PE3-Atm-Trunk1.1] pvc 1/100 [PE3-atm-pvc-Atm-trunk1.1-1/100] quit [PE3-Atm-Trunk1.1] mpls l2vc 1.1.1.1 pw-template pwt 1 tunnel-policy ct Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 92 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- [PE2] display atm-trunk 1 Interface Atm-Trunk1's state information is: Operate status: up Number Of Up Port In Trunk: 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PortName Status Active Status Atm1/0/1 Active Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 93 1 mpls te path explicit-path path1 mpls te reserved-for-binding mpls te commit interface tunnel 2/0/0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack0 tunnel-protocol mpls te destination 5.5.5.5 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 94 2222.2222.2222.2222.00 graceful-restart cost-style wide-compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic-eng level-1-2 interface gigabitEthernet 2/0/1 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te interface gigabitEthernet 3/0/2 isis enable 1 mpls Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 95 3/0/2 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te interface gigabitEthernet 2/0/2 isis enable 1 interface loopBack 0 ip address 4.4.4.4 32 mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 96 222 return Configuration File on PE3. isis 1 is-level level-1 network-entity 5555.5555.5555.5555.00 graceful-restart cost-style wide-compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic-eng level-1-2 interface gigabitEthernet 3/0/2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 97 1.1.1.1 pw-template pwt 1 tunnel-policy ct mpls l2vc 4.4.4.4 3 bypass bfd bfd bind pw interface atm 1/0/2 remote-peer 1.1.1.1 pw-ttl auto-calculate discriminator local 333 discriminator remote 444 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 98: Example For Associating Dual Bypass Pws With E-Aps 1+1

    Figure 3-8 Networking diagram for Association between dual bypass PWs and E-APS 1+1 Loopback0 Loopback0 2.2.2.2 4.4.4.4 Loopback0 1.1.1.1 GE2/0/2 E-APS ATM 1/0/0 GE2/0/2 GE3/0/2 GE3/0/2 ATM 1/0/0 Loopback0 Loopback0 3.3.3.3 5.5.5.5 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 99 1+1 bidirectional protection on the AC side. Establish the primary and secondary PWs connecting PE1 to PE2 and PE3, and two bypass PWs between PE2 and PE3. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 100 [P1-isis-1] cost-style wide-compatible [P1-isis-1] timer spf 1 1 50 [P1-isis-1] traffic-eng level-1-2 [P1-isis-1] quit [P1] interface gigabitEthernet 2/0/1 [P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] isis enable 1 [P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] quit [P1] interface gigabitEthernet 3/0/2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 101 [PE3-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] quit [PE3] interface gigabitEthernet 2/0/2 [PE3-GigabitEthernet2/0/2] isis enable 1 [PE3-GigabitEthernet2/0/2] quit [PE3] interface loopback 0 [PE3-LoopBack0] isis enable 1 [PE3-LoopBack0] quit Step 2 Configure MPLS TE tunnels. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 102 [PE2-LoopBack0] ip address 4.4.4.4 32 [PE2-LoopBack0] quit [PE2] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 [PE2] mpls [PE2-mpls] mpls te [PE2-mpls] quit [PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/2 [PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] mpls [PE2-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] mpls te Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 103 [PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te tunnel-id 2 [PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te path explicit-path path2 [PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te reserved-for-binding [PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] mpls te commit [PE1-Tunnel2/0/0] quit # Configure PE2. [PE2] interface tunnel 1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 104 [PE3-Atm1/0/2] aps revert 5 [PE3-Atm1/0/2] aps timers 1 180 [PE3-Atm1/0/2] quit # Configure CE2. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname CE2 [CE2] interface atm 2/0/1 [CE2-Atm2/0/1] aps group 1 [CE2-Atm2/0/1] aps working Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 105 [PE2] mpls l2vpn [PE2-l2vpn] quit [PE2] pw-template pwt [PE2-pw-template-pwt] control-word [PE2-pw-template-pwt] quit [PE2] interface atm-trunk 1.1 p2p [PE2-Atm-Trunk1.1] pvc 1/100 [PE2-atm-pvc-Atm-trunk1.1-1/100] quit [PE2-Atm-Trunk1.1] mpls l2vc 1.1.1.1 pw-template pwt 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 106 [PE1-bfd-session-bfd2] quit # Configure PE2. [PE2] bfd [PE2-bfd] quit [PE2] bfd bfd bind pw interface atm-trunk 1 [PE2-bfd-session-bfd] discriminator local 111 [PE2-bfd-session-bfd] discriminator remote 222 [PE2-bfd-session-bfd] commit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 107 [PE2] display aps group 1 APS Group 1: Atm1/0/1 working channel 1(Active) APS protection channel is 5.5.5.5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Group Work-Channel Protect-Channel Wtr W-State P-State Switch-Cmd Switch-Result -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 108 0 ip address 1.1.1.1 32 mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1 mpls mpls te explicit-path path1 next hop 10.1.1.2 next hop 10.1.4.2 next hop 4.4.4.4 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 109 1/0/0 discriminator local 444 discriminator remote 333 commit return Configuration file of P1 isis 1 is-level level-1 network-entity 2222.2222.2222.2222.00 graceful-restart Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 110 3.3.3.3 mpls mpls te return Configuration file of PE2 isis 1 is-level level-1 network-entity 4444.4444.4444.4444.00 graceful-restart cost-style wide-compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic-eng level-1-2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 111 1 aps working 5.5.5.5 4.4.4.4 aps timers 1 180 atm-trunk 1 aps track bfd-session session-name pe3 interface atm-trunk 1 mpls l2vpn pw-template pwt control-word Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 112 4.4.4.4 pw-template mpw 101 admin mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 mpls mpls te explicit-path path next hop 10.1.5.1 next hop 10.1.2.1 next hop 1.1.1.1 interface tunnel 1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 113 LoopBack1 select-board 1 discriminator local 1000 discriminator remote 1001 commit bfd pe3 bind pw interface LoopBack2 track-interface interface atm 1/0/2 discriminator local 2000 discriminator remote 2001 commit return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 114: Example For Configuring Dual-System Aps In The Scenario Of Forwarding Ip Packets Using Ppp

    5.5.5.5 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Assign an IP address to each interface. Configure E-APS on PE2 and PE3 and configure APS on CE2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 115 [CE2-Cpos3/0/0] aps revert 1 [CE2-Cpos3/0/0] quit Create a CPOS-Trunk on PE2, PE3, and CE2 and add interfaces to the CPOS-Trunk. # Configure PE2. [PE2] interface Cpos-Trunk 24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 116 # Configure PE3. [PE3] interface Trunk-Serial 24/24:0 [PE3-Trunk-Serial24/24:0] link-protocol ppp [PE3-Trunk-Serial24/24:0] ppp mp-global global-mp-group 24 [PE3-Trunk-Serial24/24:0] quit # Configure CE2. [CE2] interface Trunk-Serial 24/24:0 [CE2-Trunk-Serial24/24:0] link-protocol ppp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 117 [P1-isis-1] traffic-eng level-1-2 [P1-isis-1] quit [P1] interface gigabitEthernet 2/0/1 [P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] isis enable 1 [P1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] quit [P1] interface gigabitEthernet 3/0/2 [P1-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] isis enable 1 [P1-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] quit [P1] interface loopback 0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 118 [PE3-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] isis enable 1 [PE3-GigabitEthernet3/0/2] quit [PE3] interface gigabitEthernet 2/0/2 [PE3-GigabitEthernet2/0/2] isis enable 1 [PE3-GigabitEthernet2/0/2] quit [PE3] interface loopback 0 [PE3-LoopBack0] isis enable 1 [PE3-LoopBack0] quit [PE3] interface global-mp-group 24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 119 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 Global-Mp-Group24 192.168.1.1 [PE3] display current-configuration | include route import-route static ip route-static 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 Global-Mp-Group24 192.168.1.1 [CE2] display current-configuration | include route Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 120 Configuration file of P2 isis 1 is-level level-1 network-entity 3333.3333.3333.3333.00 graceful-restart cost-style wide-compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic-eng level-1-2 interface gigabitEthernet 2/0/2 isis enable 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 121 5555.5555.5555.5555.00 graceful-restart cost-style wide-compatible timer spf 1 1 50 traffic-eng level-1-2 interface gigabitEthernet 3/0/2 isis enable 1 interface gigabitEthernet 2/0/2 isis enable 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 122 24 interface Cpos- Trunk24 e1 24 unframed interface Trunk- Serial24/24:0 link-protocol ppp mp-global global-mp-group 24 interface Global-Mp- Group24 ip address 192.168.1.3 255.255.255.0 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 123: Vrrp Configuration

    This section describes how to configure fast Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) to detect faults within milliseconds. If the master router or link fails, services rapidly switch to a backup router, which helps improve network reliability. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 124 This section describes how to maintain VRRP by deleting VRRP statistics, and monitoring VRRP operations. 4.12 Configuration Examples This section provides VRRP configuration examples. Each configuration example includes networking requirements, configuration roadmap, data preparation, configuration procedure, and configuration files. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 125: Vrrp Overview

    Another method is to use dynamic routing protocols, such as the Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, or Internet Control Message Protocol Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 126 On a multicast or broadcast LAN such as an Ethernet network, a logical VRRP gateway ensures reliability for key links. VRRP is highly reliable and prevents service interruption if a physical Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 127 When the master router fails, a backup router with a higher priority than others takes over traffic. Figure 4-3 shows a VRRP backup group working in master/backup mode. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 128 192.168.1.2/24 10.1.1.100/24 GE3/0/0 RouterC 20.1.1.1/24 POS2/0/0 HostB 20.1.1.100/24 192.168.2.2/24 HostC POS1/0/0 10.1.1.101/24 GE2/0/0 192.168.2.1/24 10.1.1.2/24 RouterB Ethernet group 2:Master group 1:Backup Backup group 1 Virtual IP Address:10.1.1.111 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 129: Vrrp Features That The Ne80E/40E Supports

    An mVRRP backup group is configured, and VRRP backup groups are bound to the mVRRP backup group. The mVRRP backup group sends VRRP Advertisement packets to determine the master and backup status. This prevents the increasing number of VRRP Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 130 If the monitored interface's status changes, tracked object's the VRRP-enabled devices change the VRRP status changes, priority values and elect a master device. the VRRP backup Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 131 When a the specified active link. master/backup VRRP switchover is performed, the bound feature is notified of the switchover and also performs a Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 132 Association between VRRP and EFM to Not supported implement a rapid master/backup VRRP switchover Association between VRRP and routes to Not supported implement a network-to-user traffic switchover Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 133: Configuring Basic Functions Of A Vrrp Ipv4 Backup Group

    Figure 4-5 Default gateway on a LAN Gateway:10.0.0.1 IP Address:10.0.0.2/24 10.0.0.1/24 Gateway:10.0.0.1 Network IP Address:10.0.0.3/24 RouterA Gateway:10.0.0.1 IP Address:10.0.0.4/24 Ethernet Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 134 The GigabitEthernet,Ethernet, virtual Ethernet (VE),Eth-Trunk, VLANIF and the GE sub-interface support VRRP. Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring basic functions of a VRRP IPv4 backup group, complete the following task: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 135: Creating A Vrrp Backup Group

    If a VRRP virtual IP address is an IP address mapped to a static ARP entry on a device, the device generates incorrect host routes, affecting traffic forwarding. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 136: Configuring Vrrp Priorities On Interfaces In A Vrrp Backup Group

    One VRRP backup group can work only in master/backup mode. routers in the VRRP backup group have different priorities. The router with a higher VRRP priority than others is in the Master state and others are in the Backup state. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 137: Optional) Configuring Vrrp Packet Attributes

    Advertisement packets without authenticating them because it considers all VRRP Advertisement packets valid. On a vulnerable network, the NE80E/40E must authenticate VRRP Advertisement packets in either simple or Message Digest 5 (MD5) mode. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 138 VRRP TTL detection: A VRRP-enabled NE80E/40E checks the TTL in every received VRRP Advertisement packet and discards the packets if TTLs are not 255. This function needs to be disabled on a network with Huawei and non-Huawei devices to prevent incorrect packet loss.
  • Page 139 The mode for sending VRRPv3 Advertisement packets is configured. Disable VRRP TTL check. Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Run: interface interface-type interface-number The interface view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 140 The QinQ termination sub-interface in the Master state is configured to send gratuitous ARP packets carrying the outer VLAN ID and the minimal inner VLAN ID. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 141: Optional) Configuring Vrrp Time Parameters

    The vrrp vrid virtual-router-id preempt-mode disable command is used to set the non-preemption mode for routers in the VRRP backup group. In a VRRP backup group Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 142: Optional) Configuring Smooth Vrrp Switching

    Router completes the AMB/SMB switchover, it detects that it has a higher priority than the other master Router, and therefore retains the Master state. The other master v Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 143: Optional) Enabling The Ping To A Virtual Ip Address

    The router allows user devices to ping a virtual IP address to serve the following purposes: Monitors the operating status of the master router in a VRRP backup group. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 144: Optional) Configuring The Backup Device To Forward Traffic

    NOTE Configure the backup device to forward traffic on the master or backup device in a VRRP backup group. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 145: Checking The Configurations

    4.2.9 Checking the Configurations You can view the status of the VRRP backup group and verify the configuration. Prerequisites The configurations of the VRRP backup group are complete. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 146: Configuring An Mvrrp Ipv4 Backup Group

    Last change time : 2010-06-22 17:33:00 Run the display vrrp state-change interface vrid command to view the last 10 changes in the status of the VRRP backup group. <HUAWEI> display vrrp state-change interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 vrid 1 Time SourceState DestState...
  • Page 147 VRRP-disabled interfaces can be bound to an mVRRP backup interfaces group. A master/slave mVRRP switchover can trigger the active/ standby switchover on these interfaces, preventing traffic loss. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 148: Creating An Mvrrp Backup Group

    Down. If a direct link fails, the mVRRP-enabled NPE ignores the fault and continues forwarding traffic. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 149: Configuring An Mvrrp Backup Group Binding

    VRRP backup groups, VRRP-disabled interfaces, or PWs can be bound to an mVRRP backup group. After a binding is configured, the mVRRP backup group determines the master and backup VRRP status of the bound objects. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 150 The interface is bound to an mVRRP backup group. Bind a PW to an mVRRP backup group. Run: system-view Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 151: Optional) Configuring The Bfd Sampling Function To Implement A Rapid Master/Backup Vrrp Switchover

    A peer must exist before the PW is bound to an mVRRP backup group. For information about PW configurations, see the chapter "VPLS Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN. ----End 4.3.4 (Optional) Configuring the BFD Sampling Function to...
  • Page 152 BFD sessions tracked by mVRRP. If the specified maximum number of link BFD sessions go Down, a master/backup VRRP switchover is performed. This is BFD sampling. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 153 BFD for CR-LSP l BFD for TE Step 4 Run: vrrp vrid virtual-router-id track link-bfd down-number down-number The maximum number is set for link BFD sessions tracked by mVRRP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 154: Checking The Configurations

    After completing the configuration, run the display vrrp binding admin-vrrp command to view all the bindings between the mVRRP backup group and VRRP backup groups, interfaces, and PWs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 155: Configuring Vrrp Ipv4 Association

    Although the master/backup VRRP switchover can be performed, route switching is unable to be performed because no route is associated with the VRRP backup group. Either VRRP switchover latency or the route switching failure causes traffic loss. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 156: Associating A Vrrp Ipv4 Backup Group With A Vrrp-Disabled Interface

    The master device cannot detect changes in the status of interfaces that are not in a VRRP IPv4 backup group. If a VRRP-disabled interface connected to a network fails, the master device is Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 157: Associating A Vrrp Ipv4 Backup Group With A Bfd Session

    BFD module notifies the VRRP IPv4 backup group of the change. After receiving the notification, the VRRP IPv4 backup group rapidly performs a master/backup VRRP switchover. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 158 BFD session becomes Failed. The value ranges from 1 to 255. The smallest priority value can be set to 1. Priority value 0 is reserved for special use. If a backup device receives a Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 159: Associating An Ipv4 Vrrp Backup Group With Efm

    Association between an IPv4 VRRP backup group and an EFM session: A IPv4 VRRP backup group can be associated with an EFM session to track the session status. If an EFM Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 160 SoftX interface status and synchronize a master/backup VRRP switchover and an active/standby interface switchover, associate the VRRP backup group with EFM active/standby extension on PE1 and PE2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 161: Associating A Vrrp Backup Group With Routes

    4.4.5 Associating a VRRP Backup Group with Routes A VRRP backup group can be associated with routes. This ensures consistent routes for network- to-user and user-to-network traffic. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 162 At present, an interface can be configured with multiple VRRP backup groups, each of which has its own VRRP status. Configuring a single VRRP backup group on an interface is recommended, preventing route flapping. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 163: Checking The Configurations

    The priority reduction triggers a master/backup VRRP switchover. On the network shown in Figure 4-13, VRRP-enabled NPEs are connected to user-side PEs through active and Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 164 VRRP-disabled interface or feature and reduces its priority if the tracked interface or feature status changes. Perform the following steps on the master device in an mVRRP backup group: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 165: Configuring A Fast Vrrp Backup Group

    Fast VRRP monitors real-time services, such as voice services, voice over IP (VoIP), online games, and teleconference. Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 166 This implementation prevents user devices from learning about an incorrect master router's IP address when two master routers coexist or a master/backup VRRP switchover is performed frequently. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 167 After a binding is configured, the mVRRP backup group determines the master and backup VRRP status of the bound service interfaces or PWs. Configure the fast VRRP backup group as an mVRRP backup group. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 168 The PW is bound to the mVRRP backup group. NOTE A peer must exist before the PW is bound to the mVRRP backup group. For information about PW configurations, see the chapter "VPLS Convergence Configuration" in HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright ©...

  • Page 169: Configuring A Unicast Vrrp Backup Group

    A priority is configured for the device in the unicast VRRP backup group. The default priority is 100. Step 6 (Optional) Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 170 VRRP backup group with an interface monitoring group. When the link failure ratio on the access or network side reaches a specified threshold, the unicast VRRP backup group performs a master/backup switchover. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 171: Configuring Basic Functions Of A Vrrp Ipv6 Backup Group

    Usually, all hosts on a network segment use default routes in which the next-hop address is the same gateway address. The hosts use their default routes to send packets to the gateway and the Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 172 The GigabitEthernet,Ethernet, virtual Ethernet (VE),Eth-Trunk, VLANIF and the GE sub-interface support VRRP. Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring basic functions of a VRRP IPv6 backup group, complete the following task: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 173: Configuring A Vrrp Ipv6 Backup Group

    Different VRRP IPv6 backup groups on different interfaces of a device can use the same VRID. Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Step 2 Run: interface interface-type interface-number Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 174: Configuring Vrrp Priorities On Interfaces In A Vrrp Ipv6 Backup Group

    Interfaces in a VRRP IPv6 backup group can be configured with different VRRP priorities. These VRRP priorities determine the master and backup states for the interfaces. The interface Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 175: Optional) Configuring Vrrp Ipv6 Advertisement Packet Attributes

    VRRP IPv6 routers in a VRRP IPv6 backup group. Sending the VRRP IPv6 Advertisement packets helps implement status transition and master election. VRRP IPv6 packets have the following attributes: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 176: Optional) Configuring Vrrp Ipv6 Time Parameters

    VRRP IPv6 TTL detection: A VRRP-enabled device checks the TTL in every received VRRP Advertisement packet and discards the packets if the TTLs are not 255. On a network with Huawei and non-Huawei devices, this function needs to be disabled to prevent packet loss.
  • Page 177 Master state. This state cannot be preempted even if the master router's priority decreases. To restore the default preemption mode, run the undo vrrp6 vrid preempt-mode command. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 178 The interval at which VRRP IPv6 Advertisement packets are sent is configured. The default interval is 1 second. If multiple VRRP IPv6 backup groups are configured, increase the interval to prevent the VRRP IPv6 status from flapping. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 179: Optional) Configuring Smooth Vrrp Ipv6 Switching

    Smooth VRRP IPv6 switching is enabled, and the interval carried in VRRP IPv6 Advertisement packets during smooth switching is configured. By default, smooth VRRP switching is enabled, and the interval carried in VRRP IPv6 Advertisement packets is 100 seconds. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 180: Optional) Enabling The Ping To A Virtual Ip Address

    If a master device or a working path is faulty and traffic is switched from the working path to a protection path before a master/backup VRRP6 switchover is complete, Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 181 RNC1 Master Active link Standby link NPE4 RNC2 NPE2 Backup VRRP6 NPE3 NPE1 RNC1 Master Standby link Active link NPE4 RNC2 NPE2 Backup Procedure Step 1 Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 182: Checking The Configurations

    When multiple VRRP IPv6 backup groups coexist, they can be bound to an mVRRP IPv6 backup group, decreasing VRRP Advertisement packets to be sent and minimizing network bandwidth Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 183: Before You Start

    IPv6 backup group cannot be bound to another mVRRP IPv6 backup group. Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring an mVRRP IPv6 backup group, complete the following task: Configuring network layer attributes for interfaces to ensure network connectivity Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 184: Creating An Mvrrp Ipv6 Backup Group

    The VRRP priority of the device in the VRRP IPv6 backup group is set. The default VRRP priority is 100. Step 5 Run: admin-vrrp6 vrid virtual-router-id The VRRP backup group is configured as an mVRRP backup group. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 185: Binding A Service Vrrp Ipv6 Backup Group To An Mvrrp Ipv6 Backup Group

    IPv6 back group. A VRRP IPv6 backup group can only be bound to a single mVRRP IPv6 backup group. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 186: Checking The Configurations

    IPv6 backup group and its service IPv6 backup groups. <HUAWEI> display vrrp6 binding admin-vrrp6 Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/0, admin-vrrp6 vrid: 1, state: Master Member-vrrp number: 1 Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1, vrid: 1, state: Master Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 187: Configuring Vrrp Ipv6 Association

    Data Preparation To configure VRRP IPv6 association, you need the following data. Data Number of an interface to be tracked, VRID of a VRRP IPv6 backup group Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 188: Associating A Vrrp Ipv6 Backup Group With A Vrrp-Disabled Interface

    VRRP priority increases if the tracked interface goes Down. The value is an integer ranging from 1 to 255. Only the IP Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 189: Associating A Vrrp Ipv6 Backup Group With A Bfd Session

    VRRP IPv4 backup group. l session-id: allows only a static BFD session to be bound to the VRRP IPv4 backup group. VRRP6 means VRRP applications on IPv6 networks. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 190 VRRP IPv6 backup group tracks the link BFD session status incorrectly and obtains incorrect tracking results. This command applies to the following types of link BFD sessions: – BFD for static LSP Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 191: Checking The Configurations

    Config type : normal-vrrp Track BFD : 2 Priority increased : 40 BFD-Session State : Up Create time : 2010-06-22 17:35:06 UTC+08:00 Last change time : 2010-06-22 17:35:16 UTC+08:00 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 192: Configuring Arp Update Triggered By Changes In The Outbound Interfaces Of The Vrrp Virtual Mac Address

    VLANIF interface. Step 4 (Optional) Run: arp-detect ip-address enable The VLANIF interface is enabled to send ARP probe packets. Step 5 (Optional) Run: arp-detect interval seconds Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 193: Maintaining Vrrp

    Monitoring VRRP status by viewing information about VRRP during the operation. Context The following commands are run in any view during routine maintenance to show VRRP status. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 194: Configuration Examples

    VRRP backup group. The master router is transmitting data. If the master router fails, the backup router takes over traffic. After the master router recovers, traffic switches back to the master router. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 195 Procedure Step 1 Configure the devices to ensure network connectivity. The configuration details are not provided here. # Assign 10.1.1.111 to the default gateway for host A. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 196 <RouterA> display vrrp GigabitEthernet2/0/0 | Virtual Router 1 State : Master Virtual IP : 10.1.1.111 Master IP : 10.1.1.1 PriorityRun : 120 PriorityConfig : 120 MasterPriority : 120 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 197 OSPF 192.168.2.2 Pos1/0/0 127.0.0.0/8 Direct 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 127.0.0.1/32 Direct 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 192.168.1.0/24 OSPF 10.1.1.1 GigabitEthernet2/0/0 192.168.2.0/24 Direct 192.168.2.1 Pos1/0/0 192.168.2.1/32 Direct 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 192.168.2.2/32 Direct 192.168.2.2 Pos1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 198 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 return Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 199: Example For Configuring Vrrp Backup Groups Working In Load Balancing Mode

    In this example, two VRRP backup groups are configured to work in load balancing mode. Devices in the VRRP backup groups back up each other and load-balance traffic. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 200 GE 1/0/1 User network VRRP backup group 10 10.10.1.111 VRRP backup group 20 10.20.1.111 User GE 1/0/2 GE 1/0/2 network Switch B Router B Host B 10.20.1.100/24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 201 Step 1 Configure interface IP addresses and OSPF on Router A, Router B, and Router C. # Configure Router A. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname RouterA [RouterA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo shutdown [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ip address 10.10.1.1 24 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 202 [RouterC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255 [RouterC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255 [RouterC-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit [RouterC-ospf-1]quit Step 2 Configure Layer 2 transparent transmission on switches. # Configure switch A. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname SwitchA Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 203 192.168.3.1(192.168.3.1), max hops: 30 ,packet length: 40,press CTRL_C to break 10.10.1.1 100 ms 80 ms 60 ms 192.168.1.2 100 ms 60 ms 80 ms 192.168.3.1 130 ms 90 ms 90 ms Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 204 Auth Type : NONE Virtual Mac : 0000-5e00-010a Check TTL : YES Config type : normal-vrrp Backup-forward : disabled Create time : 2014-03-12 17:33:00 Last change time : 2014-03-12 17:33:06 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 205 10 virtual-ip 10.10.1.111 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown ip address 10.20.1.2 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 20 virtual-ip 10.20.1.111 vrrp vrid 20 priority 120 vrrp vrid 20 preempt-mode timer delay 20 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 206 10 return Switch B configuration file sysname SwitchB vlan batch 20 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port default vlan 20 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 port default vlan 20 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 207: Example For Connecting Vrrp Backup Groups To L3Vpns

    Run the service VRRP between NPEs. The service VRRP and the mVRRP are bound on the NPE; the mVRRP determines the master or backup status of the service VRRP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 208 GE2/0/0 10.1.1.2/24 40.1.1.2/24 Access network GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 10.1.1.1/24 40.1.1.1/24 Loopback1 Loopback1 GE1/0/1 30.1.1.1/24 2.2.2.9/32 1.1.1.9/32 GE1/0/1 20.1.1.1/24 UPE1 UPE2 GE1/0/2.1 GE1/0/2.1 GE1/0/0.1 GE1/0/0.1 100.1.1.1/24 100.2.1.1/24 VPN1 VPN2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 209 Step 2 Create eight VE interfaces in four groups on each NPE. # Configure NPE1. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname NPE1 [NPE1] interface virtual-ethernet2/0/0 [NPE1-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0] ve-group 1 l2-terminate [NPE1-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0] quit [NPE1] interface virtual-ethernet2/0/1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 210 Step 3 Configure the MPLS L3VPN on backbone network. Configure the IGP between the NPE and the PE on the backbone network. IS-IS is used in the example. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 211 10.5.1.0/24 NULL Pos2/0/0 Direct D/-/ L/-/- 10.6.1.0/24 NULL Pos3/0/0 Direct D/-/ L/-/- Flags: D-Direct, A-Added to URT, L-Advertised in LSPs, S-IGP Shortcut, U-Up/Down Bit Set, C-In Computing Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 212 Run the display mpls ldp session command. You can view that the "Status" in the output is "Operational". Take PE3 as an example. [PE3] display mpls ldp session LDP Session(s) in Public Network Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 213 [NPE2-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/7.1] ip binding vpn-instance VPN2 [NPE2-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/7.1] ip address 172.17.1.3 24 [NPE2-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/7.1] quit # Configure PE3. [PE3] ip vpn-instance VPN1 [PE3-vpn-instance-VPN1] ipv4-family [PE3-vpn-instance-VPN1-af-ipv4] route-distinguisher 100:3 [PE3-vpn-instance-VPN1-af-ipv4] vpn-target 111:1 both Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 214 [NPE2-ospf-200-area-0.0.0.0] network 172.17.1.0 0.0.0.255 [NPE2-ospf-200-area-0.0.0.0] quit [NPE2-ospf-200] quit [NPE2] bgp 100 [NPE2-bgp] ipv4-family vpn-instance VPN1 [NPE2-bgp-VPN1] import-route direct [NPE2-bgp-VPN1] import-route ospf 100 [NPE2-bgp-VPN1] quit [NPE2-bgp] ipv4-family vpn-instance VPN2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 215 You can view that the BGP peer relationship is set up between NPE and PE, and it is in the Established status. Take NPE1 as an example. [NPE1] display bgp peer BGP local router ID : 3.3.3.9 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 216 [UPE2-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit [UPE2-ospf-1] quit # Configure NPE1. [NPE1] ospf [NPE1-ospf-1] area 0 [NPE1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 [NPE1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.255 [NPE1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 3.3.3.9 0.0.0.0 [NPE1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit [NPE1-ospf-1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 217 [UPE2-mpls-ldp] quit [UPE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [UPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls [UPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] mpls ldp [UPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit [UPE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 [UPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mpls [UPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mpls ldp [UPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit # Configure NPE1. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 218 [UPE2] vsi admin-vsi2 static [UPE2-vsi-admin-vsi2] pwsignal ldp [UPE2-vsi-admin-vsi2-ldp] vsi-id 20 [UPE2-vsi-admin-vsi2-ldp] peer 3.3.3.9 upe [UPE2-vsi-admin-vsi2-ldp] peer 4.4.4.9 upe [UPE2-vsi-admin-vsi2-ldp] quit [UPE2-vsi-admin-vsi2] encapsulation ethernet [UPE2-vsi-admin-vsi2] admin-vsi [UPE2-vsi-admin-vsi2] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 219 : 1.1.1.9 local VC label : 140289 remote VC label : 148480 control word : disable forwarding entry : exist local group ID manual fault : not set Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 220 [UPE1-vsi-vsi1] encapsulation ethernet [UPE1-vsi-vsi1] track admin-vsi admin-vsi1 [UPE1-vsi-vsi1] quit [UPE1] interface gigabitethenet 1/0/2.1 [UPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/2.1] vlan-type dot1q 101 [UPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/2.1] l2 binding vsi vsi1 [UPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/2.1] quit # Configure UPE2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 221 : vlan destination : 1.1.1.9 local group ID remote group ID local VC label : 140288 remote VC label : 140292 local AC OAM State : up Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 222 [NPE2] interface virtual-ethernet2/0/1 [NPE2-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/1] ip address 192.168.1.2 24 [NPE2-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/1] vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 192.168.1.254 [NPE2-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/1] admin-vrrp vrid 1 [NPE2-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/1] quit [NPE2] interface virtual-ethernet2/0/3 [NPE2-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/3] ip address 192.168.2.2 24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 223 Bind the service VRRP to the mVRRP. # Configure NPE1. [NPE1] interface virtual-ethernet2/0/5 [NPE1-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/5] vrrp vrid 3 track admin-vrrp interface virtual- ethernet2/0/1 vrid 1 unflowdown [NPE1-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/5] quit [NPE1] interface virtual-ethernet2/0/7 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 224 Check TTL : YES Config type : admin-vrrp Virtual-Ethernet2/0/1 | Virtual Router 1 state : Master Virtual IP : 192.168.1.254 PriorityRun : 120 PriorityConfig : 120 MasterPriority : 120 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 225 You can view that the status of BFD is Up. Take PE1 as an example. [NPE1] display bfd session all ------------------------------------------------------------------- Local Remote PeerIpAddr State Type InterfaceName ------------------------------------------------------------------- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 226 # Configure NPE2. [NPE2] bfd link1 bind ldp-lsp peer-ip 1.1.1.9 nexthop 10.2.1.1 interface gigabitethernet 2/0/1 [NPE2-bfd-session-link1] discriminator local 41 [NPE2-bfd-session-link1] discriminator remote 14 [NPE2-bfd-session-link1] process-pst [NPE2-bfd-session-link1] commit [NPE2-bfd-session-link1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 227 : Initialize Virtual IP : 172.17.1.254 PriorityRun : 100 PriorityConfig : 100 MasterPriority : 100 preempt : yes delay time : 0 TimerRun : 1 TimerConfig : 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 228 [HUAWEI] sysname CE1 [CE1] interface gigabitethernet1/0/0.1 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] vlan-type dot1q 101 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] ip address 172.16.1.1 24 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] quit [CE1] ospf 100 [CE1-ospf-100] area 0 [CE1-ospf-100-area-0.0.0.0] network 172.16.1.0 0.0.0.255 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 229 You can view that the previous backup mVRRP is now the master and the status of the service VRRP is the same as that of the bound mVRRP. Take NPE1 as an example: [NPE1] interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 230 Check TTL : YES Config type : admin-vrrp Track BFD : 31 type: link bfd-session state : DOWN Track BFD : 341 type: peer bfd-session state : DOWN Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 231 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2.1 vlan-type dot1q 101 l2 binding vsi vsi1 interface LoopBack1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 232 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 10.4.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown ip address 10.3.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2.1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 233 Pos1/0/0 undo shutdown link-protocol ppp ip address 10.5.1.2 255.255.255.0 isis enable 1 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 234 Virtual-Ethernet2/0/4.1 vlan-type dot1q 1 mpls l2vc 1.1.1.9 101 interface Virtual-Ethernet2/0/5 ve-group 3 l3-access interface Virtual-Ethernet2/0/5.1 vlan-type dot1q 1 ip binding vpn-instance VPN1 ip address 172.16.1.2 255.255.255.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 235 5.5.5.9 enable ipv4-family vpnv4 policy vpn-target peer 5.5.5.9 enable ipv4-family vpn-instance VPN1 import-route ospf 100 import-route direct ipv4-family vpn-instance VPN2 import-route ospf 200 import-route direct ospf 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 236 GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 10.4.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1 undo shutdown ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0 ve-group 1 l2-terminate Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 237 1 ip binding vpn-instance VPN1 ip address 172.16.1.3 255.255.255.0 interface Virtual-Ethernet2/0/6 ve-group 4 l2-terminate interface Virtual-Ethernet2/0/6.1 vlan-type dot1q 1 mpls l2vc 2.2.2.9 102 interface Virtual-Ethernet2/0/7 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 238 VPN2 import-route ospf 200 import-route direct ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.255 network 10.4.1.0 0.0.0.255 network 4.4.4.9 0.0.0.0 ospf 100 vpn-instance VPN1 import-route bgp domain-id 0.0.0.10 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 239 1 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 5.5.5.9 255.255.255.255 isis enable 1 bgp 100 peer 3.3.3.9 as-number 100 peer 3.3.3.9 connect-interface LoopBack1 peer 4.4.4.9 as-number 100 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 240 Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 vlan-type dot1q 10 ip address 172.17.1.1 255.255.255.0 ospf 200 area 0.0.0.0 network 172.17.1.0 0.0.0.255 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 241: Example For Configuring A Vrrp Backup Group On Vlanif Interfaces

    GE1/0/1 and Eth-Trunk1 members GE 2/0/0 and GE 2/0/1. The deployment causes broadcast storms on the ring network. A ring network protocol can be configured to break loops and prevent broadcast storms. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 242 GE3/0/0 NPE2 Backup NOTE In this example, MSTP is used. For information about other ring network protocols, see HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access. Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Assign an IP address to each interface to ensure IP connectivity.
  • Page 243 [NPE1-Eth-Trunk1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 [NPE1-Eth-Trunk1] quit # Configure NPE2. [NPE2] interface eth-trunk 1 [NPE2-Eth-Trunk1] quit [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] undo shutdown [NPE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] eth-trunk1 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 244 [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp enable [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit # Configure NPE2. [NPE2] stp enable [NPE2] interface eth-trunk 1 [NPE2-Eth-Trunk1] stp enable [NPE2-Eth-Trunk1] quit [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp enable [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 245 State : Master Virtual IP : 10.1.1.1 Master IP : 10.1.1.2 PriorityRun : 130 PriorityConfig : 130 MasterPriority : 130 Preempt : YES Delay Time : 0 s Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 246 [NPE2] display vrrp Vlanif10 | Virtual Router 1 State : Master Virtual IP : 10.1.1.1 Master IP : 10.1.1.3 PriorityRun : 100 PriorityConfig : 100 MasterPriority : 100 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 247 1 priority 0 stp enable return Configuration file of NPE1 sysname NPE2 vlan batch 10 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown portswitch port default vlan 10 interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 248: Example For Configuring An Mvrrp Backup Group To Ignore The Interface Down Event

    BFD session to be established between NPEs. Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E/40E. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 249 A link BFD session is established between each NPE and each CE. The mVRRP backup group tracks each link BFD session. The mVRRP backup group can rapidly perform a master/backup VRRP switchover if two or more link BFD sessions go Down. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 250 101 virtual-ip 10.101.1.200 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.102 ip address 10.102.1.253 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 102 virtual-ip 10.102.1.200 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103 ip address 10.103.1.253 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 103 virtual-ip 10.103.1.200 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 251 The following example provides only the configuration procedure on each NPE. For the procedure for configuring a link BFD session on each CE, see the chapter "BFD Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability. For the procedure for configuring the VPLS on each CE, see the chapter "VPLS Configuration"...
  • Page 252 [NPE1] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.103 [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] control-vid 103 qinq-termination [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] qinq termination pe-vid 10 ce-vid 401 to 500 [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] ip address 10.103.1.254 24 [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] arp broadcast enable [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 253 = 90/142/180 ms Split horizon configured on the VPLS network prevents data transmission between interfaces on NPEs. Therefore, the sub-interfaces where service VRRP backup groups are configured on Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 254 --- 10.100.1.1 ping statistics --- 5 packet(s) transmitted 5 packet(s) received 0.00% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 70/122/190 ms Step 3 Configure basic VRRP functions on QinQ termination sub-interfaces. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 255 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.100] vrrp vrid 100 virtual-ip 10.100.1.200 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.100] quit [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.101 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101] qinq vrrp pe-vid 10 ce-vid 201 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101] vrrp vrid 101 virtual-ip 10.101.1.200 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101] quit [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.102 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 256 [NPE1] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.101 [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101] vrrp vrid 101 track admin-vrrp interface eth- trunk1.1 vrid 10 unflowdown [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101] quit [NPE1] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.102 [NPE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.102] vrrp vrid 102 track admin-vrrp interface eth- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 257 GE1/0/1.103 Member 10.103.1.200 The command output shows that the service VRRP backup groups have been successfully bound to the mVRRP backup group and their statuses are correct. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 258 NPE. The command output shows that the value of the Commit field is True. In the following example, the display on NPE1 is used. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 259 NPE. The mVRRP backup group has been bound to a peer BFD session and four link BFD sessions, and all BFD sessions are Up. [NPE1] display vrrp interface eth-trunk 1.1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 260 The command output on NPE1 is as follows: l In mVRRP backup group 10, the value of the State field is Master and the value of the Type field is Admin. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 261 Type field is Admin. l In service VRRP backup group 100, the value of the State field is Initialize and the value of the Type field is Member. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 262 In each of service VRRP backup groups, the value of the State field is Initialize and the value of the Type field is Member. [NPE1] display vrrp brief VRID State Interface Type Virtual IP Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 263 VRID State Interface Type Virtual IP -------------------------------------------------------- Master Eth-Trunk1.1 Admin 10.1.1.1 Master GE1/0/1.100 Member 10.100.1.200 Master GE1/0/1.101 Member 10.101.1.200 Master GE1/0/1.102 Member 10.102.1.200 Master GE1/0/1.103 Member 10.103.1.200 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 264 GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101 control-vid 101 qinq-termination qinq termination pe-vid 10 ce-vid 201 to 300 qinq vrrp pe-vid 10 ce-vid 201 ip address 10.101.1.254 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 101 virtual-ip 10.101.1.200 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 265 10 ce-vid 1 to 100 qinq vrrp pe-vid 10 ce-vid 100 ip address 10.1.1.253 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 10 virtual-ip 10.1.1.1 admin-vrrp vrid 10 ignore-if-down Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 266 10.100.1.1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.100 source-ip 10.100.1.253 auto commit bfd link2 bind peer-ip 10.101.1.1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101 source-ip 10.101.1.253 auto commit bfd link3 bind peer-ip 10.102.1.1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.102 source-ip 10.102.1.253 auto Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 267 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.0 network 200.1.34.0 0.0.0.255 network 200.1.35.0 0.0.0.255 return Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 mpls mpls l2vpn Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 268 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 vlan-type dot1q 10 l2 binding vsi ldp1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown ip address 200.1.35.5 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 269 10.101.1.1 auto commit bfd link13 bind peer-ip 10.102.1.254 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.102 source- p 10.102.1.1 auto commit bfd link14 bind peer-ip 10.103.1.254 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103 source- p 10.103.1.1 auto Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 270: Example For Implementing A Rapid Vrrp Switchover Using Bfd Sampling

    To improve link reliability in this scenario, the BFD sampling mode can be used. NOTE Each NPE enabled with BFD sampling establishes a link BFD session with each CE. The configurations on NPEs are described as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 271 A link BFD session is established between each NPE and each CE. The mVRRP backup group tracks each link BFD session. The mVRRP backup group can rapidly perform a master/backup VRRP switchover if two or more link BFD sessions go Down. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 272 10.102.1.253 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 102 virtual-ip 10.102.1.200 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103 ip address 10.103.1.253 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 103 virtual-ip 10.103.1.200 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 273 The following example provides only the configuration procedure on each NPE. For the procedure for configuring a link BFD session on each CE, see the chapter "BFD Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability. For the procedure for configuring the VPLS on each CE, see the chapter "VPLS Configuration"...
  • Page 274 [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.103 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] control-vid 103 qinq-termination [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] qinq termination pe-vid 10 ce-vid 401 to 500 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] ip address 10.103.1.253 24 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] arp broadcast enable [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 275 Reply from 10.100.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=2 ttl=255 time=120 ms Reply from 10.100.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=255 time=130 ms Reply from 10.100.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=255 time=100 ms Reply from 10.100.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=5 ttl=255 time=70 ms Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 276 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] vrrp vrid 103 virtual-ip 10.103.1.200 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103] quit # After completing the preceding configurations, run the display vrrp brief command on each NPE. The command output on NPE1 is as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 277 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101] vrrp vrid 101 track admin-vrrp interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.1 vrid 10 unflowdown [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101] quit [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.102 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.102] vrrp vrid 102 track admin-vrrp interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.1 vrid 10 unflowdown [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1.102] quit [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.103 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 278 [NPE1-bfd-session-link1] quit [NPE1] bfd link2 bind peer-ip 10.101.1.1 interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.101 source- ip 10.101.1.254 auto [NPE1-bfd-session-link2] commit [NPE1-bfd-session-link2] quit [NPE1] bfd link3 bind peer-ip 10.102.1.1 interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.102 source- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 279 InterfaceName -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8192 8192 10.1.1.253 S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 8193 8192 10.100.1.1 S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1/0/1.100 8194 8193 10.101.1.1 S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1/0/1.101 8195 8194 10.102.1.1 S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1/0/1.102 8196 8195 10.103.1.1 S_AUTO_IF GigabitEthernet1/0/1.103 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 280 Virtual Mac : 0000-5e00-010a Check TTL : YES Config type : admin-vrrp Backup-forward : disabled Config track link-bfd down-number : 2 Track BFD : link1 type: link Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 281 The command output on NPE2 is as follows: l In mVRRP backup group 10, the value of the State field is Backup and the value of the Type field is Admin. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 282 The command output on NPE2 is as follows: l In mVRRP backup group 10, the value of the State field is Backup and the value of the Type field is Admin. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 283 In each of service VRRP backup groups, the value of the State field is Master and the value of the Type field is Member. [NPE2] display vrrp brief VRID State Interface Type Virtual IP Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 284 State Interface Type Virtual IP -------------------------------------------------------- Backup GE1/0/1.1 Admin 10.1.1.1 Backup GE1/0/1.100 Member 10.100.1.200 Backup GE1/0/1.101 Member 10.101.1.200 Backup GE1/0/1.102 Member 10.102.1.200 Backup GE1/0/1.103 Member 10.103.1.200 ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 285 10 ce-vid 401 to 500 qinq vrrp pe-vid 10 ce-vid 401 ip address 10.103.1.254 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 103 virtual-ip 10.103.1.200 vrrp vrid 103 track admin-vrrp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 vrid 10 unflowdown Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 286 10 ce-vid 201 to 300 qinq vrrp pe-vid 10 ce-vid 201 ip address 10.101.1.253 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 101 virtual-ip 10.101.1.200 vrrp vrid 101 track admin-vrrp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 vrid 10 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 287 100 peer 4.4.4.4 peer 5.5.5.5 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 200.1.34.3 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 288 GigabitEthernet1/0/4 undo shutdown ip address 200.1.45.4 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255 ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 4.4.4.4 0.0.0.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 289 Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown mode user-termination interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.100 control-vid 100 qinq-termination qinq termination pe-vid 10 ce-vid 110 ip address 10.100.1.1 255.255.255.0 arp broadcast enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 290: Example For Associating A Vrrp Backup Group With A Bfd Session

    Down. Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E/40E. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 291 BFD session is used, its configuration is similar to that of the peer BFD session, with the exception that the IP address of a directly connected interface is specified in the bfd btoa bind peer-ip command to configure the link BFD session. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 292 # Create VRRP backup group 10 and set the VRRP priority to 140 on Router B so that Router B is the Backup. [RouterB] interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] vrrp vrid 10 virtual-ip 10.1.1.3 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] vrrp vrid 10 priority 140 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 293 BFD session goes Up. [RouterA] display vrrp GigabitEthernet2/0/0 | Virtual Router 10 State : Master Virtual IP : 10.1.1.3 Master IP : 10.1.1.1 PriorityRun : 160 PriorityConfig : 160 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 294 Run the display vrrp command on Router B. The VRRP status is Master and the BFD session status is DOWN on Router B. [RouterB] display vrrp GigabitEthernet2/0/0 | Virtual Router 10 state : Master Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 295 10 track bfd-session 2 increased 40 bfd btoa bind peer-ip 10.1.1.1 interface gigabitethernet2/0/0 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 min-tx-interval 50 min-rx-interval 50 commit return Configuration file of switch A Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 296: Example For Associating A Vrrp Backup Group With An Efm Session

    Router A and Router B. The VRRP backup group updates the VRRP status of each VRRP device based on changes in the EFM and peer BFD session status. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 297 VRID (10), virtual IP address (10.1.1.111), VRRP priorities (160 for Router A and 140 for Router B), and value (40) by which Router B increases its VRRP priority and preempts the Master if a link fails Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 298 5s and the interval at which errored frame seconds are detected to 120s. In the following example, the display on Router A is used. [RouterA] efm enable [RouterA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] efm enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 299 Priority increased : 40 BFD-Session State : UP Create time : 2010-06-22 17:33:00 Last change time : 2010-06-22 17:33:04 Step 6 Associate the VRRP backup group with the EFM session. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 300 Check TTL : YES Config type : normal-vrrp Backup-forward : disabled Config track link-bfd down-number : 0 Track BFD : 2 Priority increased : 40 BFD-session state : DOWN Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 301 120 bfd btoa bind peer-ip 10.1.1.1 interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 commit return Configuration file of switch 1 sysname Switch1 vlan batch 10 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 302: Example For Associating A Vrrp Backup Group With A Route

    Router C's interface connected to the network. If the interface goes Down, the RM module instructs the VRRP module to perform a master/backup VRRP switchover. After the interface goes Up, traffic switches back to the previous master device. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 303 (10.0000.0000.0001.00) and IS-IS level (Level-1), and Router C's IS-IS entity name (10.0000.0000.0002.00) Route (destination address of 10.2.1.1) tracked by VRRP and value (40) by which Router A's VRRP priority decreases if the route becomes unreachable. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 304 Master IP : 10.1.1.1 PriorityRun : 100 PriorityConfig : 100 MasterPriority : 120 Preempt : YES Delay Time : 0 s TimerRun : 1 s TimerConfig : 1 s Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 305 [RouterC] display isis lsdb Database information for ISIS(1) -------------------------------- Level-1 Link State Database LSPID Seq Num Checksum Holdtime Length ATT/P/OL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0000.0000.0001.00-00 0x0000000d 0x61b6 0/0/0 0000.0000.0001.02-00 0x00000003 0xaadf 0/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 306 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] vrrp vrid 1 track ip route 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 reduced 40 Step 5 Configure the switch. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname Switch [Switch] vlan 10 [Switch-vlan10] port gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [Switch-vlan10] port gigabitethernet 2/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 307 Master IP : 10.1.1.1 PriorityRun : 120 PriorityConfig : 120 MasterPriority : 110 Preempt : YES Delay Time : 20 s TimerRun : 1 s TimerConfig : 1 s Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 308 1 return Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB isis 1 is-level level-1 network-entity 20.0000.0000.0001.00 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 10.1.1.10 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 309: Example For Configuring A Vrrp Ipv6 Backup Group

    VRRP IPv6 backup group. The master router is transmitting data. If the master router fails, the backup router takes over traffic. After the master router recovers, traffic switches back to the master router. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 310 Step 1 Configure hosts. For configuration details, see the configuration file of this example. Set the IPv6 address of a default gateway for host A to 2001:db8::100 and that for host B to 2001:db8:3::2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 311 : 2000-01-12 20:15:46 UTC+08:00 <RouterB> display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 | Virtual Router 1 State : Backup Virtual IP : FE80::1 2001:DB8::100 Master IP : 2001:DB8::1 PriorityRun : 100 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 312 Router A. The command output shows that the VRRP status is Master on Router A. <RouterA> display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 | Virtual Router 1 State : Master Virtual IP : FE80::1 2001:DB8::100 Master IP : 2001:DB8::1 PriorityRun : 120 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 313 2001:DB8::2/64 vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual-ip FE80::1 link-local vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual-ip 2001:DB8::100 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0 interface Pos1/0/0 link-protocol ppp undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001:DB8:2::1/64 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 314: Example For Configuring Vrrp Ipv6 Backup Groups Working In Load Balancing Mode

    Host A uses the virtual IPv6 address of backup group 1 as a default gateway address and host B uses the virtual IPv6 address of backup group 2 as a default gateway address. The two backup groups load-balance traffic and back up each other. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 315 VRID (2) and virtual IPv6 address (2001:db8::60) for another VRRP IPv6 backup group configured on Router A and Router B VRRP priorities (120 for Router B and 100 for Router A) in backup group 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 316 Master in backup group 1 and the Backup in backup group 2. [RouterA] display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 | Virtual Router 1 State : Master Virtual IP : FE80::1 2001:DB8::100 Master IP : 2001:DB8::1 PriorityRun : 120 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 317 Preempt : YES Delay Time : 0 s TimerRun : 100 cs TimerConfig : 100 cs Virtual Mac : 0000-5e00-0102 Check hop limit : YES Config type : normal-vrrp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 318 2 virtual-ip 2001:DB8::60 vrrp6 vrid 2 priority 120 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0 interface Pos1/0/0 link-protocol ppp undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001:DB8:2::1/64 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 319: Example For Configuring Vrrp Ipv6 Association

    VRRP IPv6 backup group detects that the active link on the master router fails or if a VRRP-disabled interface associated with the VRRP IPv6 backup group fails. After the master router recovers, traffic switches back to the master router. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 320 Router A to the upper-layer network so that Router A can reduce its VRRP priority and trigger a master/backup VRRP switchover if its tracked interface goes Down. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 321 [RouterB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] undo shutdown [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ipv6 enable [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ipv6 address 2001:db8::2 64 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual-ip FE80::1 link-local [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] vrrp6 vrid 1 virtual-ip 2001:db8::100 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 322 VRRP status is Master on Router A and Backup on Router B. [RouterA] display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 | Virtual Router 1 State : Master Virtual IP : FE80::1 2001:DB8::100 Master IP : 2001:DB8::1 PriorityRun : 120 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 323 Last change time : 2010-06-22 17:35:14 UTC+08:00 [RouterB] display vrrp6 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 | Virtual Router 1 State : Master Virtual IP : FE80::1 2001:DB8::100 Master IP : 2001:DB8::2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 324 1 virtual-ip 2001:DB8::100 vrrp6 vrid 1 priority 120 vrrp6 vrid 1 preempt-mode timer delay 20 vrrp6 vrid 1 track interface pos 1/0/0 reduce 40 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 325 Configuration file of Router C sysname RouterC ipv6 ospfv3 1 router-id 3.3.3.3 interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0 undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001:DB8:3::2/64 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 326 2001:DB8:1::2 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0 interface Pos2/0/0 link-protocol ppp undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001:DB8:2::2/64 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 327: Bfd Configuration

    A static BFD session with automatically negotiated discriminators is configured to check the interworking between a device and another device on which a BFD session has been dynamically Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 328 By configuring a global destination port number for multi-hop BFD control packets, you can implement the interworking between the local device and a device running an earlier version, and between a Huawei device and a non-Huawei device. 5.13 Configuring the TTL Function Globally Configuring the TTL globally helps you connect the current device and a device running an early version.

  • Page 329: Introduction

    The local and remote discriminators are set in various modes. Based on these modes, the following types of BFD sessions are supported by the NE80E/40E: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 330 The NE80E/40E supports single-hop BFD and multi-hop BFD, both of which check the reachability of IP routes. This section describes single-hop BFD. The NE80E/40E supports single-hop BFD for the following types of links: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 331 When the number of trunk member links that are Up reaches a certain value, the trunk link keeps Up. For information about the IP-Trunk configuration, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - WAN Access; for information about the Eth-Trunk configuration, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access.
  • Page 332 BFD sessions on all trunk member interfaces. This configuration enables a rapid association between the BFD status and trunk member interfaces' status to reduce packet loss caused by member interface faults. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 333 If the link interface is a Layer 3 physical interface or Layer 2 interface that does not have an IP address, configure static BFD for default-ip for link detection. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 334 IPv4 BFD provides millisecond- level fault detection. After detecting a link or node failure, BFD will notify IS-IS of the failure, accelerating the IS-IS route convergence speed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 335 BFD sessions, link failures are notified immediately to OSPFv3 by BFD and OSPFv3 can take actions to perform route calculation and converge in the new network topology. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 336 Gbit/s, such slow detection will cause a large amount of data to be lost. As a result, the requirement for high reliability of carrier-class networks cannot be met. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 337 BFD for BGP BFD for BGP tunnel rapidly detects Configuring Dynamic BFD to Tunnel faults in E2E BGP tunnels. Monitor a BGP Tunnel Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 338 LSP between a Point of Local Repair(PLR) and its downstream neighbors. On a network where GR is enabled on the PLR and Merge Point(MP), BFD for RSVP is also recommended. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 339 PW. In this manner, if a BFD session is bound to the mVSI PW, you can monitor the service VSI only by monitoring the status of the mVSI PW. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 340: Configuring Single-Hop Bfd

    To fast check directly connected links, configure single-hop BFD. Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring single-hop BFD, complete the following tasks: Connect each interface correctly. Configure IP addresses for Layer 3 interfaces. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 341: Enabling Bfd Globally

    BFD-enabled Layer 2 switches, various default multicast addresses need to be configured for the switches, distinguishing one BFD session from others and ensuring that BFD packets are forwarded correctly. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 342: Setting Up A Bfd Session

    IPv6 address. An incorrect peer or source IPv6 address leads to a failure in creating a BFD6 session. Step 3 Configure discriminators by running the following commands: l To configure a local discriminator, run: discriminator local discr-value Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 343: Checking The Configurations

    Run the display bfd session { all | static | peer-ipv6 peer-ipv6 [ vpn-instance vpn-instance- name ] } [ verbose ] [ slot slot-id ] command to check information about a BFD6 session. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 344: Configuring The Bfd Passive Echo Function

    # After the configuration is complete, run the display bfd session all verbose command to view information about the BFD session.A one-hop BFD session is established and is in the Up state. <HUAWEI> display bfd session all verbose --------------------------------------------------------------------- Session MIndex : 256...

  • Page 345: Configuring The Bfd Session Passive Echo Function

    Echo function, you can configure the BFD passive Echo function. Context Perform the following steps on the router that is to be enabled with the passive Echo function: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 346: Checking The Configurations

    By viewing the status, type, and Echo function status of a BFD session, you can check whether the configurations are successful. Prerequisites The configurations of the BFD passive echo function are complete. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 347: Configuring The Association Between The Bfd Status And The Interface Status

    [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] } verbose [ slot slot-id ] command to check information about the BFD session. ----End Example # Display information about all the BFD sessions. <HUAWEI> display bfd session all verbose -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Session MIndex : 256 (One Hop) State : Up Name : aa...

  • Page 348: Configuring The Association Between Bfd Status And Interface Status

    By being associated with the interface status, a BFD session can affect the interface protocol status after the BFD session status changes, which triggers fast route convergence. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 349: Checking The Configurations

    If the shutdown command is run,the BFD status will not be send to the interface. ----End 5.4.3 Checking the Configurations By viewing the association between a BFD session status and the interface status, you can check whether the configurations are successful. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 350: Configuring The Association Between The Bfd Status And The Sub-Interface Status

    By associating the BFD session status with the sub-interface status, you can trigger fast route convergence. This function is applicable to the single-hop BFD session that detects default multicast IP addresses. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 351: Before You Start

    BFD session status changes, which triggers fast route convergence. Context Perform the following procedure on the NE80E/40E that needs to rapidly detect the link fault: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 352: Checking The Configurations

    By viewing the identifier of the association between the BFD session status and the sub-interface status, you can check whether the configurations are successful. Prerequisites The configurations of the association between the BFD status and the sub-interface status function are complete. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 353: Configuring The Bfd To Modify The Pst

    ] } [ verbose ] [ slot slot-id ] command to check the BFD6 session. ----End Example Run the display bfd session all verbose command. <HUAWEI> display bfd session all verbose -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Session MIndex : 256 (One Hop) State : Up...

  • Page 354: Permitting The Bfd To Modify The Pst

    PST. NOTE l For the LDP FRR, refer to chapter "MPLS Basic Configuration"in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - MPLS. l IP FRR works for the public network and for the private network. For information about the IP FRR for the public network, refer to Chapter 10 "Routing Policy Configuration"...

  • Page 355: Checking The Configurations

    ] } [ verbose ] [ slot slot-id ] command to check information about the BFD6 session. ----End Example After the configuration, running the display bfd session command, you can view that the field of "Process PST" in the command output is "Enable". Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 356: Configuring The Multi-Hop Bfd

    HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability 5 BFD Configuration <HUAWEI> display bfd session all verbose -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Session MIndex : 256 (One Hop) State : Up Name : test -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Local Discriminator : 22 Remote Discriminator : 11 Session Detect Mode...

  • Page 357: Enabling Bfd Globally

    For an IPv4 link: Run the bfd bfd-name bind peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] [ source- ip source-ip ] [ track-interface { { interface { interface-name | interface-type interface- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 358 The local discriminator of the local device must be the same as the remote discriminator of the remote device. Otherwise, the session cannot be correctly set up. After the local and remote discriminators are configured, they cannot be modified. Step 4 Run: commit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 359: Checking The Configurations

    Example After the configuration, run the display bfd session all verbose command. You can view that a multi-hop BFD session is established. The BFD session is Up. <HUAWEI> display bfd session all verbose -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Session MIndex : 256 (Multi Hop) State : Up...

  • Page 360: Configuring A Bfd Session With Automatically Negotiated Discriminators

    Before configuring a BFD session with automatically negotiated discriminators, complete the following tasks: Correctly connect interfaces. Correctly configure an IP address for a Layer 3 interface. Data Preparation To complete the configuration, you need the following data. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 361: Enabling Bfd Globally

    To configured BFD for IPv4, Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Run: bfd bfd-name bind peer-ip ip-address [ vpn-instance-name vpn-name ] [ interface interface-type interface-number ] source-ip ip-address auto Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 362: Checking The Configurations

    BFD session of the Static_Auto type has been established. The local and remote discriminators of this BFD session are 8193 and 8192 respectively and have been obtained based on automatic negotiation. <HUAWEI> display bfd session all verbose -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Session MIndex : 16385...

  • Page 363: Configuring The Delay Of A Bfd Session To Go Up

    Before configuring the delay of BFD session status change to Up, ensure that the router runs properly. Data Preparation To complete the configuration, you need the following data. Data Delay time Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 364: Configuring The Delay For Bfd Session Status Change To Up

    Xs indicates that after X seconds, the system recovers, and the BFD session goes Up. <HUAWEI> display bfd statistics Current Display Board Number : Main ; Current Product Register Type: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 365: Configuring A Bfd Session With The One-Arm Echo Function

    5.10.1 Before You Start Before configuring the BFD session with the one-arm Echo function, familiarize yourself with the usage scenario, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 366: Enable Bfd Globally

    5.10.3 Establishing a BFD Session By establishing a BFD session on a BFD-capable device, you can rapidly detect a direct link between the BFD-capable device and its BFD-incapable peer. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 367: Checking The Configurations

    By viewing the type and status of a BFD session with the one-arm Echo function, you can check whether the configurations are correct. Prerequisites The configurations of the one-arm Echo function are complete. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 368: Adjusting Bfd Parameters

    After a BFD session with the one-arm Echo function has been successfully configured, run the display bfd session all verbose command, and you can view detailed information about the session. <HUAWEI> display bfd session all verbose -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Session MIndex : 256...

  • Page 369: Before You Start

    Modifying the BFD detection time allows a BFD session to effectively detect faults on network links. Context Perform the following procedure on the router: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Step 2 Run: bfd bfd-name Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 370: Configuring The Bfd Wtr

    5.11.3 Configuring the BFD WTR The wait to restore (WTR) time for a BFD session is used to prevent frequent master/slave switchovers triggered by BFD session flapping. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 371: Adding The Description Of A Bfd Session

    BFD sessions that are created by using automatically negotiated discriminators. Perform the following procedure on the router: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 372: Setting The Priority Of A Bfd Session

    0 to 7. The default priority is 7. Setting the Priority for all the static BFD Sessions Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 373: Checking The Configurations

    Run the display bfd configuration { all | static [ name bfd-name ] | discriminator local- discr-value | dynamic | peer-ip peer-ip [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] } [ verbose ] to check BFD configurations. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 374: Globally Configuring The Destination Port Number For The Multi-Hop Bfd Control Packet

    By configuring a global destination port number for multi-hop BFD control packets, you can implement the interworking between the local device and a device running an earlier version, and between a Huawei device and a non-Huawei device. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright ©...

  • Page 375: Before You Start

    NE80E/40E can be configured with destination port 3784 for the multi-hop BFD control packet. To interwork with the non-Huawei device, the device running the NE80E/40E can be configured with destination port 4784 for the multi-hop BFD control packet.

  • Page 376: Checking The Configurations

    [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] | static } [ verbose ] [ slot slot-id ] command to view information about the BFD session. Run the display bfd statistics [ slot slot-id ] command to view information about statistics of global BFD. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 377: Configuring The Ttl Function Globally

    If devices running different versions interwork with each other, the TTL values and detection modes on both ends of a BFD session are different, resulting in BFD packet loss. The TTL is set globally to enable Huawei devices to interwork with Huawei devices running different NE80E/40E versions and non-Huawei devices.

  • Page 378: Configuring The Ttl Globally

    5.13.3 Checking the Configurations By viewing the global TTL in BFD control packets, you can check whether the configurations are successful. Prerequisites The configurations of the global TTL are completed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 379: Configuring The Interval For Trap Messages Are Sent

    Before configuring the interval at which trap messages are sent, enable BFD globally. Data Preparation To configure the interval at which trap messages are sent, you need the following data. Data Interval at which trap messages are sent Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 380: Configuring The Interval At Which Trap Messages Are Sent

    Run the display current-configuration configuration bfd command, and you can view that the interval at which trap messages are sent is 300 seconds. <HUAWEI> display current-configuration configuration bfd snmp-agent bfd trap-interval 300 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 381: Setting The Trap Threshold For Bandwidth Consumption In The Fast Packet Transmission Channel

    Current tx bandwidth is 0 bps Current rx bandwidth is 0 bps Max bandwidth is 2850000000 bps Free bandwidth is 2850000000 bps Bandwidth alarm threshold is 80% Bandwidth exceed threshold: NO Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 382: Maintaining Bfd

    Monitoring BFD status by viewing information about BFD during the operation. Context The following commands are run in any view during routine maintenance to show BFD status. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 383: Configuration Examples

    POS interfaces cannot be configured on the -X1 or -X2 models of NE80E/40Es. On the network shown in Figure 5-4, BFD in asynchronous mode is used to detect a directly connected link between Router A and Router B. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 384 Step 2 Configure single-hop BFD. # Enable BFD on Router A, create a BFD session between Router A and Router B, and bind Router A's interface to the BFD session. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 385 Session Echo Tx TmrID : -- PDT Index : FSM-0|RCV-0|IF-0|TOKEN-0 Session Description : -- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0 ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of Router A Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 386: Example For Configuring Single-Hop Bfd For An Ip-Trunk Member Link

    BFD is performed on the IP-Trunk member POS 1/0/0. Figure 5-5 Networking diagram of configuring single-hop BFD for an IP-Trunk member link POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 RouterB RouterA IP-Trunk1 IP-Trunk1 POS2/0/0 POS2/0/0 10.1.1.1/24 10.1.1.2/24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 387 [RouterB] interface ip-trunk 1 [RouterB-Ip-Trunk1] undo shutdown [RouterB-Ip-Trunk1] ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 [RouterB-Ip-Trunk1] least active-linknumber 1 [RouterB-Ip-Trunk1] quit [RouterB] interface pos 1/0/0 [RouterB-Pos1/0/0] undo shutdown [RouterB-Pos1/0/0] link-protocol hdlc Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 388 # Configure a BFD session on Router A and bind the member interface POS 1/0/0 to the BFD session. [RouterA] bfd [RouterA-bfd] quit [RouterA] bfd to_Link1 bind peer-ip default-ip interface pos 1/0/0 [RouterA-bfd-session-to_Link1] discriminator local 10 [RouterA-bfd-session-to_Link1] discriminator remote 20 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 389 IP-Trunk link is still Up. [RouterA] display bfd session all verbose -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Session MIndex : 256 (One Hop) State : Down Name : to_link1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 390 The Number of UP Ports in Trunk : 1 ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA interface Ip-Trunk1 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 391: Example For Configuring Singe-Hop Bfd For An Ip-Trunk Link

    On the network shown in Figure 5-6, an IP-Trunk link composed of two POS links exists between Router A and Router B. Single-hop BFD is performed on an IP-Trunk link. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 392 [RouterA] interface pos 1/0/0 [RouterA-Pos1/0/0] undo shutdown [RouterA-Pos1/0/0] link-protocol hdlc [RouterA-Pos1/0/0] ip-trunk 1 [RouterA-Pos1/0/0] quit [RouterA] interface pos 2/0/0 [RouterA-Pos2/0/0] undo shutdown [RouterA-Pos2/0/0] link-protocol hdlc [RouterA-Pos2/0/0] ip-trunk 1 [RouterA-Pos2/0/0] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 393 Reply from 10.1.1.2: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=255 time=10 ms Reply from 10.1.1.2: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=255 time=30 ms Reply from 10.1.1.2: bytes=56 Sequence=5 ttl=255 time=40 ms --- 10.1.1.2 ping statistics --- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 394 : -- Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : -- PDT Index : FSM-0|RCV-0|IF-0|TOKEN-0 Session Description : -- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 395 Output bandwidth utilization : 0.01% ----------------------------------------------------- PortName Status Weight ----------------------------------------------------- Pos1/0/0 DOWN Pos2/0/0 ----------------------------------------------------- The Number of Ports in Trunk : 2 The Number of UP Ports in Trunk : 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 396 0 errors,0 drops, Output:0 packets,0 bytes, 0 errors,0 drops Input bandwidth utilization : 0.01% Output bandwidth utilization : 0.01% ----------------------------------------------------- PortName Status Weight ----------------------------------------------------- Pos1/0/0 DOWN Pos2/0/0 DOWN ----------------------------------------------------- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 397 1 interface Pos2/0/0 link-protocol hdlc undo shutdown ip-trunk 1 bfd btoa bind peer-ip 10.1.1.1 interface ip-trunk 1 discriminator local 20 discriminator remote 10 wtr 5 commit return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 398: Example For Configuring Single-Hop Bfd For A Layer 3 Eth-Trunk Member Link

    BFD control packets are used. Procedure Step 1 Configure an Eth-Trunk interface. # Create an Eth-Trunk interface on Router A. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname RouterA [RouterA] interface eth-trunk 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 399 Output bandwidth utilization : 0.01% ----------------------------------------------------- PortName Status Weight ----------------------------------------------------- GigabitEthernet1/0/0 GigabitEthernet2/0/0 ----------------------------------------------------- The Number of Ports in Trunk : 2 The Number of UP Ports in Trunk : 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 400 : Disable Acl Number : -- Destination Port : 3784 : 255 Proc interface status : Disable Process PST : Disable WTR Interval (ms) : 300000 Active Multi Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 401 Output:0 packets,0 bytes 0 unicast,0 broadcast,0 multicast 0 errors,0 drops Input bandwidth utilization : 0.00% Output bandwidth utilization : 0.01% ----------------------------------------------------- PortName Status Weight ----------------------------------------------------- GigabitEthernet1/0/0 DOWN Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 402 1 interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown eth-trunk 1 bfd to_link1 bind peer-ip default-ip interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0 discriminator local 11 discriminator remote 10 wtr 5 commit return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 403: Example For Configuring Single-Hop Bfd For A Layer 3 Eth-Trunk Link

    Step 1 Configure an Eth-Trunk interface. # Create an Eth-Trunk interface on Router A and set the lower threshold of Eth-Trunk member links in the Up state to 1. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 404 0 unicast,0 broadcast,0 multicast 0 errors,0 drops Output:0 packets,0 bytes 0 unicast,0 broadcast,0 multicast 0 errors,0 drops Input bandwidth utilization : 0.00% Output bandwidth utilization : 0.01% Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 405 : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type : Interface(Eth-Trunk1) Bind Session Type : Static Bind Peer Ip Address : 10.1.1.2 NextHop Ip Address : 10.1.1.2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 406 Route Port,Hash arithmetic : According to flow,Maximal BW: 4G, Current BW: 4G, The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 Internet Address is 10.1.1.1/24 IP Sending Frames" Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc90-5851 Physical is ETH_TRUNK Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 407 IP Sending Frames" Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc90-5851 Physical is ETH_TRUNK Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 408 Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB interface Eth-Trunk1 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown eth-trunk 1 interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown eth-trunk 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 409: Example For Configuring Single-Hop Bfd For Vlanif Interfaces

    NOTE Default values of the minimum sending interval, minimum receiving interval, and local detection multiplier for BFD control packets are used. Procedure Step 1 Configure VLAN 10. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 410 Reply from 10.1.1.2: bytes=56 Sequence=2 ttl=255 time=31 ms Reply from 10.1.1.2: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=255 time=62 ms Reply from 10.1.1.2: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=255 time=62 ms Reply from 10.1.1.2: bytes=56 Sequence=5 ttl=255 time=62 ms Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 411 : -- Session Init TmrID : -- Session WTR TmrID : -- PDT Index : FSM-0|RCV-0|IF-0|TOKEN-0 Session Description : -- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 412 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown portswitch port default vlan 10 bfd atob bind peer-ip 10.1.1.2 interface vlanif 10 discriminator local 10 discriminator remote 20 commit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 413: Example For Configuring The Association Between The Bfd Status And The Interface Status

    Figure 5-10 Configuring the association between BFD status and interface status GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 RouterA RouterB Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Configure a BFD session on Router A. Configure a BFD session on Router B. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 414 # On Router B, enable BFD and configure a BFD session between Router B and Router A. [RouterB] bfd [RouterB-bfd] quit [RouterB] bfd btoa bind peer-ip default-ip interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [RouterB-bfd-session-btoa] discriminator local 20 [RouterB-bfd-session-btoa] discriminator remote 10 [RouterB-bfd-session-btoa] wtr 5 [RouterB-bfd-session-btoa] commit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 415 Local Discriminator : 10 Remote Discriminator : 20 Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type : Interface(GigabitEthernet1/0/0) Bind Session Type : Static Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 416 Line protocol current state : UP(BFD status down) Last line protocol up time: 2008-10-16 09:25:17 Description : GigabitEthernet1/0/0 Interface, Route Port The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 bytes Internet Address is 10.1.1.1/24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 417 Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 bfd btoa bind peer-ip default-ip interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 discriminator local 20 discriminator remote 10 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 418: Example For Configuring The Association Between The Bfd Status And The Sub-Interface Status

    IP address of the main interface on the remote end of a BFD session Local interface sending and receiving BFD control packets Local discriminator and remote discriminator of the BFD session Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 419 # After the configuration is complete, run the display bfd session all verbose command on Router A and Router B, and you can view that a one-hop BFD session is set up, and the session status is Up. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 420 : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type : Interface(GigabitEthernet1/0/0) Bind Session Type : Static Bind Peer Ip Address : 224.0.0.184 NextHop Ip Address : 224.0.0.184 Bind Interface : GigabitEthernet1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 421 Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 bytes Internet Address is 10.2.1.1/24 IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fcc7-565a Encapsulation dot1q Virtual LAN, Vlan number 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 422: Example For Configuring Multi-Hop Bfd

    5.17.9 Example for Configuring Multi-Hop BFD This example shows how to configure a BFD session on both ends of a multi-hop path to fast detect faults on the multi-hop path. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 423 The interface is not bound to the BFD session. <RouterA> system-view [RouterA] bfd [RouterA-bfd] quit [RouterA] bfd atoc bind peer-ip 10.2.1.2 [RouterA-bfd-session-atoc] discriminator local 10 [RouterA-bfd-session-atoc] discriminator remote 20 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 424 PDT Index : FSM-0|RCV-0|IF-0|TOKEN-0 Session Description : -- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0 ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA interface Pos1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 425: Example For Configuring A Bfd Session With The One-Arm Echo Function

    5-13, Router A supports BFD but Router B does not. A BFD session with the one-arm Echo function needs to be configured on Router A to fast detect the Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 426 [HUAWEI] sysname RouterB [RouterB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] undo shutdown [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.2 24 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit Step 2 Configure a BFD session with the one-arm Echo function. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 427 Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA interface gigabitethernet1/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 bfd atob bind peer-ip 10.1.1.2 interface gigabitEthernet1/0/0 one-arm-echo discriminator local 1 commit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 428: Example For Configuring Bfd For Vpn Routes

    POS2/0/0 POS2/0/0 GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 172.20.1.2/24 172.16.1.1/24 10.1.1.2/24 10.2.1.2/24 MPLS Backbone AS:100 GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 10.1.1.1/24 10.2.1.1/24 VPN-A VPN-A AS:65410 AS:65420 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 429 # On PE2, configure a BFD session between PE2 and PE1 and bind the session to the VPN instance. <PE2> system-view [PE2] bfd [PE2-bfd] quit [PE2] bfd 2to1_vpn bind peer-ip 10.1.1.2 vpn-instance vpna [PE2-bfd-session-2to1_vpn] discriminator local 21 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 430 100:1 vpn-target 111:1 export-extcommunity vpn-target 111:1 import-extcommunity mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown ip binding vpn-instance vpna ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 431 3.3.3.3 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos2/0/0 link-protocol ppp undo shutdown ip address 172.20.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown ip binding vpn-instance vpna Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 432 172.20.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 ospf 100 area 0.0.0.0 network 172.16.1.0 0.0.0.255 network 172.20.1.0 0.0.0.255 network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0 Return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 433: Example For Configuring Sub-Interfaces For Dot1Q Vlan Tag Termination To Support Bfd

    Router B functions as a backup device. VRRP backup group 1 on Router A and Router B to track the status of the BFD session. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 434 Configure VRRP backup group 1 on GE 2/0/0.1 of Router A and GE 2/0/0.1 of Router B. Router A functions as a master device and Router B functions as a backup device. Data Preparation To complete the configuration, you need the following data: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 435 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] undo shutdown [RouterB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] ip address 10.1.1.2 24 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] quit [RouterB] ospf 1 [RouterB-ospf-1] area 0 [RouterB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 [RouterB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 [RouterB-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] quit [RouterB-ospf-1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 436 Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=254 time=5 ms Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=254 time=1 ms Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=56 Sequence=5 ttl=254 time=8 ms --- 192.168.1.1 ping statistics --- 5 packet(s) transmitted Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 437 (One Hop) State : Up Name : atob ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Local Discriminator Remote Discriminator Session Detect Mode : Asynchronous Mode Without Echo Function BFD Bind Type : Interface(GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1) Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 438 Virtual Mac 0000-5e00-0101 Check TTL : YES Config type : normal-vrrp Config track link-bfd down-number : 0 Track BFD Priority reduced : 10 BFD-session state : UP ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 439 1 virtual 10.1.1.100 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd-session 2 arp broadcast enable bfd atob bind peer-ip default-ip interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0.1 discriminator local 2 discriminator remote 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 440: Example For Configuring Sub-Interfaces For Qinq Vlan Tag Termination To Support Bfd

    GE 2/0/0.1 is a sub-interface for QinQ VLAN tag termination on Router A, and GE 2/0/0.1 is a sub-interface for QinQ VLAN tag termination on Router B. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 441 192.168.1.1/24 RouterA RouterB BFD session GE2/0/0.1 GE2/0/0.1 10.1.1.1/24 10.1.1.2/24 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/2 GE1/0/0 Switch1 GE1/0/0 Switch2 GE2/0/0 VLAN10 Host 100.1.1.3/24 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 442 [RouterA] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0.1 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] undo shutdown [RouterA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] ip address 10.1.1.1 24 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] quit [RouterA] ospf 1 [RouterA-ospf-1] area 0 [RouterA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255 [RouterA-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 443 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 17 Routes : 17 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 444 [RouterA] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0.1 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] control-vid 1 qinq-termination [RouterA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] qinq termination pe-vid 100 ce-vid 10 # Configure Router B. [RouterB] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0.1 [RouterB-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] control-vid 1 qinq-termination Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 445 Step 7 Configure VRRP backup group 1 to track the status of the BFD session. # Configure Router A. [RouterA] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0.1 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] qinq vrrp pe-vid 100 ce-vid 10 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1] vrrp vrid 1 virtual 10.1.1.100 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 446 1 virtual 10.1.1.100 vrrp vrid 1 priority 160 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd-session 1 arp broadcast enable bfd atob bind peer-ip default-ip interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0.1 discriminator local 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 447 GigabitEthernet 1/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 192.168.2.2 24 interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 192.168.1.2 24 ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255 network 192.168.2.0 0.0.0.255 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 448: Example For Configuring Single-Hop Bfd6 For A Layer 3 Physical Link

    Router A and Router C. Figure 5-17 Networking diagram of single-hop BFD6 for a Layer 3 physical link RouterA RouterB GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0 2001:db8::1/64 2001:db8::2/64 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 449 B, and bind an outbound interface to the BFD session. [RouterA] bfd [RouterA-bfd] quit [RouterA] bfd atob bind peer-ipv6 2001:db8::2 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0 [RouterA-bfd-session-atob] discriminator local 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 450 : FSM-0|RCV-0|IF-0|TOKEN-0 Session Description : -- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0 ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA ipv6 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 451: Example For Configuring Multi-Hop Bfd6

    Configure a BFD6 session on Router A to detect faults in a multi-hop link from Router A toRouter C. Configure a BFD6 session on Router C to detect faults in a multi-hop link from Router C toRouter A. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 452 # Create a BFD session on Router A to detect faults in the link from Router A to Router C. Do not bind the BFD session to an outbound interface. [RouterA] bfd Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 453 PDT Index : FSM-0|RCV-0|IF-0|TOKEN-0 Session Description : -- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0 ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA ipv6 ospfv3 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 454 1.1.1.1 interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown ipv6 enable ipv6 address 2001:db8:2::2 ospfv3 1 area 0.0.0.0 bfd ctoa bind peer-ipv6 2001:db8:1::1 discriminator local 20 discriminator remote 10 commit return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 455: Gr Configuration

    The following section provides an example for configuring GR. Familiarize yourself with the configuration procedures against the networking diagram. The configuration example consists of the networking requirements, configuration roadmap, configuration procedures, and configuration files. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 456: Gr Introduction

    Redundancy backup for the key components in the system is an important method to improve the fault-tolerance capability of the system. Redundancy backup is performed in the following modes: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 457 The HSB can back up the static and dynamic configurations of the system from the AMB to the SMB. The AMB and SMB communicate as shown in Figure 6-1. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 458 Supporting backup of static configuration data from the AMB to the SMB Supporting dynamic backup and update of protocol status data from the AMB to the SMB Supporting the protocol-level GR capability Supporting data smoothing between modules Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 459 NOTE The mechanisms of implementing GR in each protocol are different. For the detailed value of the GR time, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - IP Routing and HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - MPLS. The administrator and the fault can trigger the restart and AMB/SMB switchover of the GR Restarter.
  • Page 460 Figure 6-3 AMB/SMB switchover of the GR Restarter RouterD Helper RouterA Restarter RouterC RouterB Helper Helper Session with GR capability The administrator restarts the GR restarter,or the GR restarter itself fails Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 461 After the GR Restarter obtains the topology information from its neighbors, it recalculates the routing table and triggers the aging of the old routes. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 462 Dependence of the recovery process on neighbor routers: Neighboring routers must support the GR capability, because GR is not "self- contained". Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 463: Gr Features Supported In The Ne80E/40E

    Martini VLL, PWE3 VPLS, and Martini VPLS The NE80E/40E integrates the advantages of the GR and the HSB to implement the HA as follows: Provides the 1+1 backup through redundancy backup Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 464: Configuring The System-Level Gr

    Configure a protocol level GR capability. NOTE For the detailed configurations of OSPF GR, IS-IS GR, and BGP GR, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/ 40E Router Configuration Guide - IP Routing; for the detailed configurations of LDP GR, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - MPLS.

  • Page 465: Optional) Configuring The Default Slot Number For The Smb

    You can enable the SMB to automatically synchronize configurations with the AMB when the AMB is writing the configurations. Context Perform the following steps on the GR Restarter: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 466: Enabling The Force Amb/Smb Switchover

    During the on-line software upgrade, the SMB software is upgraded when the AMB works normally. Then, the SMB must be restarted. After the SMB is ready, the AMB/SMB switchover can be performed. Perform the following steps on the GR Restarter: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 467: Checking The Configurations

    By monitoring the operating status of HA, you can view information about HA during the operation. Context In routine maintenance, you can run the following command in any view to display the running of HA. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 468: Configuration Examples

    When Router B performs the AMB/SMB switchover triggered by the system fault or the administrator, it is required that the service is not interrupted, that is, the current network service is not affected. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 469 # Enable the OSPF GR capability on Router B. The configuration of Router C is the same as the configuration of Router B. [RouterB-ospf-100] graceful-restart [RouterB-ospf-100] graceful-restart period 600 Step 4 Configure BGP GR functions. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 470 Flag TimeStamp Interface TunnelID 127.0.0.1/32 127.0.0.1 t[28] InLoop0 127.0.0.0/8 127.0.0.1 t[28] InLoop0 10.1.4.1/32 127.0.0.1 t[28] InLoop0 10.1.4.0/24 10.1.4.1 t[28] GE1/0/0 10.1.1.1/32 127.0.0.1 t[444] InLoop0 10.1.1.0/24 10.1.1.1 t[444] Pos2/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 471 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 bgp 65009 router-id 2.2.2.2 graceful-restart graceful-restart timer restart 600 peer 10.1.1.1 as-number 65008 ipv4-family unicast undo synchronization import-route ospf 100 peer 10.1.1.1 enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 472 10.1.2.2 255.255.255.0 interface LoopBack1 ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 ospf 100 opaque-capability enable graceful-restart period 600 area 0.0.0.0 network 10.1.3.0 0.0.0.255 network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 473: Nsr Configuration

    This section describes how to implement NSR and related technologies. 7.2 Configuring NSR After NSR is configured, route processing and traffic forwarding are not interrupted during the active/standby switchover of main control boards. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 474: Nsr Overview

    – After the device recovers, it can re-establish neighbor relationships with other devices, and then rebuild the routing table based on the information obtained from its neighbors. For details about the GR configuration, see the chapter "GR Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability.
  • Page 475 Therefore, routing forwarding errors. The occasion information may be incorrect during occurs with a very low this period of time. probability. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 476: Nsr Features Supported By The Ne80E/40E

    7.1.2 NSR Features Supported by the NE80E/40E This section lists the protocols that support NSR. Currently, the protocols that support NSR are as follows: ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 BGP4+ Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 477: Configuring Nsr

    If a fault occurs in the main process before the batch backup, the slave process, whose status is unknown and is not switchable, cannot function as the main process. The system enabled with NSR does not support system-level GR. Pre-configuration Tasks None. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 478: Enabling Nsr

    If the configurations succeed, you can obtain the following results by running the preceding commands: The HA working mode of the current system is Nonstop Routing (NSR). Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 479 Interface information, Link State Database (LSDB) information, and routing information on the standby main control board are consistent with those on the active main control board. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 480: Ethernet Oam Configuration

    Y.1731 is an OAM protocol at the network layer. It provides fault detection defined in IEEE 802.1ag and performance monitoring, such as frame loss measurement, frame delay measurement, and Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 481: Introduction

    IEEE 802.1ag, also known as Connectivity fault management (CFM), defines OAM functions for Ethernet bearer networks. CFM applies to large-scale E2E Ethernet networks and monitor network-wide connectivity and locate connectivity faults. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 482: Cfm Configuration

    802.1ag and other OAM functions, including the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI), Locked Signal (LCK), test signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS), Maintenance Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental OAM (EXP), and Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 483 802.1ag Draft 7 and Standard 802.1ag-2007 are the same. Maintenance Supported Supported The features association End Point configurations supported by 802.1ag Draft 7 and Standard 802.1ag-2007 are the same. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 484 MIP is created on the basis of interface. l According to Standard 802.1ag-20 07, the MIP is created on the basis of the MD, service or default Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 485 MA or multiple MAs. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs within an MA by exchanging Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) periodically between MEPs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 486 When the Ethernet CFM module detects a fault in an MA, the OAM management module sends fault messages to the MA at the other side through the binding relationship. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 487: Configuring Basic Ethernet Cfm

    Layer 2 network to the Layer 3 network, such as the link connectivity between the CE and PE3 and between PE2 and PE3. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 488 Name of an MA, ID of the VLAN associated with the MA ID of a MEP, name of the interface on which the MEP resides, type of the MEP Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 489 You must enable Ethernet CFM globally before configuring and applying all CFM functions. Context Perform the following steps on the router that requires Ethernet CFM: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 490 In addition, the default MD must be of the same level as the high-level MD. The high- level CCMs are transmitted through the default MD. Context Perform the following steps on each NE80E/40E device that requires Ethernet CFM: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 491 Step 4 Perform the following step as needed. l (Optional) If an MA is created on a Layer 2 device, run: map vlan vlan-id. The MA is associated with a VLAN. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 492 MEPs can be created. However, only one inward-facing interface-based MEP can be created on an interface. Only one VLAN-based MEP can be created. Perform the following steps on the edge devices of an MA: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 493 If you need to detect the connectivity between a device and an RMEP, you need to create the RMEP first. Perform the following steps on the edge devices of an MA: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 494 MD or default MD. Perform the following steps on the router that requires Ethernet CFM: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 495 MIPs within an MA receive CCMs periodically multicasted by MEPs. MIPs are used to locate faults. Context MIPs can be automatically generated based on rules or manually created on interfaces. Table describes differences between the automatic and manual creation modes. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 496 CFM is enabled or disabled. The MIP generation rule is changed. Select a proper MIP generation rule on a device to create MIPs based on the network plan. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 497 A MIP generation rule in accordance with IEEE 802.1ag Draft 7 is configured. l Configure a MIP generation rule in accordance with IEEE Standard 802.1ag-2007. Run: cfm enable (system view) Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 498 The MD view is displayed. Step 3 Run: senderid-tlv-type { chassis | chassis-manage | defer | manage | none } The Sender ID TLV is configured. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 499 Step 9 Run: remote-mep ccm-receive [ mep-id mep-id ] enable The receiving of CCMs from the RMEP within the same MA is enabled on the local MEP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 500 There are two MP address models: individual and shared. The individual MP address model facilitates fault location and the shared MP address model saves MAC entry storing space. Context The 802.1ag standard defines two MP address models: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 501 MIP. Run the display cfm mip [ interface interface-type interface-number | level level ] command to check information about a MIP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 502 L2VC ID : -- Run the display cfm ma command. If information about the MA is displayed, it means that the configuration is successful. <HUAWEI> display cfm ma md md1 The total number of MAs is 2: MD Name : md1...
  • Page 503 The status of RMEPs : 0 up, 3 down, 0 disable -------------------------------------------------- MD Name : md1 Level MA Name : ma1 RMEP ID : 50 VLAN ID : 10 VSI Name : -- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 504 : disabled Connect Status : up Run the display mip create-type command. If the MIP generation rule is correct, it means that the configuration is successful. <HUAWEI> display mip create-type interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 Interface Name MIP Create-Type MIP Create-Type On Interface ---------------------------------------------------------------------------...
  • Page 505 : 0018-8247-b977 ----------------------------------------------------- The total number of MPs is 1. The number of MEPs is 1. The number of MIPs is 0. <HUAWEI> display cfm mp-info interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 level 6 inward vlan MD Name : md1 MD Name Format...

  • Page 506: Configuring Related Parameters Of Ethernet Cfm

    After the timer expires, the alarm restoration event is notified to the device. If the RMEP frequently detects the alarm and alarm restoration signals, this means that alarm flapping occurs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 507 Step 2 Run: cfm md md-name The MD view is displayed. Step 3 Run: ma ma-name The MA view is displayed. Step 4 Run: active time time Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 508 Perform the following steps on each device: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Step 2 Run: cfm md md-name The MD view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 509: Fault Verification On The Ethernet

    Before You Start Before configuring the Ethernet fault verification function, familiarize yourself with the usage scenario, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 510 MEP at one end of the link to be tested. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 511 Context Perform Step 1 and Step 2 on the routers at both ends of the link to be tested. Perform Step 3 on any of the routers. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 512: Locating The Fault On The Ethernet

    For the network where the MD, MA, and MEP are configured, you can implement 802.1ag MAC trace to locate the connectivity fault between MEPs at the same maintenance level or between MEPs and MIPs at the same maintenance level. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 513 MEP to another MEP or a MIP in an MA or failure points, perform either of the following operations on the router with a MEP at one end of the link to be tested. l MA view Run: system-view Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 514 The intermediate device on the link to be tested only forwards LTMs and LTRs. In this manner, the MD, MA, or MEP are not required to be configured on the intermediate device. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 515 If an L2VC has been configured on an intermediate device, the ID of the L2VC cannot be 0. If the ID of the L2VC is 0, a tracing failure occurs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 516: Configuring Association Between Ethernet Cfm And An Interface

    8-4. Configure Ethernet CFM on Router A and Router B; associate Ethernet CFM with GE 1/0/1 on Router A. When the CFM OAM module on Router A detects a Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 517 GE1/0/2 GE1/0/2 GE2/0/1 GE2/0/2 RouterD Aggregation group in 1:1 Active link MEPs in MA1 Inactive link active/standby mode MEPs in MA2 MEPs in MA3 MEPs in MA4 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 518 Perform the following steps on the NE80E/40E configured with the link aggregation group in static LACP mode: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Step 2 Run: interface interface-type interface-number Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 519 : 110 tagged : 0025-9eb1-bce6 CCM Receive : enabled Trigger-If-Down : disabled CFM Status : down Alarm Status : RemoteAlarm Interface TLV : disabled Connect Status : up Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 520: Associating Efm Oam With Ethernet Cfm

    To associate Ethernet OAM with Ethernet OAM, you need the following data. Data Number of the interfaces to be associated Name of an MD and an MA Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 521 If EFM OAM is disabled on an interface, the association between EFM OAM and other functional modules is deleted. l If an MA or MD is deleted, the association between Ethernet CFM and other functional modules is deleted. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 522: Configuring Association Between Ethernet Oam And Mpls Oam Or Bfd

    Figure 8-8 Diagram of associating Ethernet OAM with MPLS OAM or BFD MPLS OAM / BFD 802.3ah 802.3ah MPLS Core Pre-configuration Tasks Before associating Ethernet OAM with MPLS OAM or BFD, complete the following tasks: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 523 Ethernet OAM and MPLS OAM or BFD can send fault information to each other. Context Perform the following steps on the PEs: Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Step 2 Run: oam-mgr Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 524 MPLS OAM is configured to send fault messages to EFM OAM. ----End Checking the Configurations By viewing whether traffic on CEs is switched to a backup path, you can check whether the configurations are successful. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 525: Associating Ethernet Cfm With Vll

    VLL, an outward-facing MEP cannot be configured between CE1 and PE1. Pre-configuration Tasks Before associating Ethernet CFM with VLL by using sub-interfaces for QinQ VLAN tag termination, complete the following tasks: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 526 Configuration Guide - Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Configure a Martini VLL. For details, refer to the chapter "VLL Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN. Configure a sub-interface to access the VLL network. – For the procedure of connecting a sub-interface or VLANIF interface to the VLL network, see the chapter "VLL Configuration"...
  • Page 527 Reserves the tag, and no action is sub-interface required. QinQ termination Strips the outer tag. Reserves the double tags, and no sub-interface (in action is required. symmetrical mode) Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 528 MEP. QinQ termination sub- Run the mep mep-id mep-id interface interface-type interface- interface number.subnumber pe-vid pe-vid ce-vid ce-vid inward command to create a MEP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 529 By configuring Ethernet CFM between a CE and the local PE, you can implement end-to-end detection, advertisement, verification, and location of connectivity faults between the CE and the local PE. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 530 Dot1q sub- Strips one tag. Reserves the tag, and no interface action is required. Dot1q termination Strips one tag. Reserves the tag, and no sub-interface action is required. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 531 Adds double tags. Removes the outer tag and sub-interface (in then adds two tags that are asymmetric mode) encapsulated Configure a MEP based on the interface type. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 532 An MA is created and the MA view is displayed. Run: map vlan vlan-id The MA is bound to a VLAN. Run: mep mep-id mep-id interface-type interface-number outward Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 533 MA. Run the display cfm mep [ md md-name [ ma ma-name [ mep-id mep-id ] ] ] command to view detailed information about the MEP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 534 L2VC ID : 11 Run the display cfm ma command. If information about the MA is displayed, it means that the configuration succeeds. <HUAWEI> display cfm ma md mdcustomer The total number of MAs is : 1 -------------------------------------------------- MD Name...

  • Page 535: Associating Ethernet Cfm With Vpls

    MAC ping and trace to locate and diagnose faults. Figure 8-10 Networking diagram for associating Ethernet CFM with VPLS I Switch1 Switch2 VPLS User User Network Network Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 536 Before associating Ethernet CFM with VPLS by using sub-interfaces, complete the following tasks: Configure a Martini VPLS network. For details, refer to the chapter "VPLS Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/ 40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN. Configure a sub-interface to access the VPLS network.
  • Page 537 MEP. QinQ termination sub- Run the mep mep-id mep-id interface interface-type interface- interface number.subnumber pe-vid pe-vid ce-vid ce-vid inward command to create a MEP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 538 Configuring Ethernet CFM on the CE and Local PE Run Ethernet CFM between the switch and local PE to check connectivity by exchanging CCMs. Procedure Perform the following steps on the PE: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 539 An RMEP is created in the MA. Run: mep ccm-send [ mep-id mep-id ] enable A MEP is enabled to send CCMs. Run: remote-mep ccm-receive [ mep-id mep-id ] enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 540 The rule for creating the MIP needs to be configured on transit nodes. For the rule for creating the MIP, see (Optional) Configuring MIPs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 541 : vsi1 Run the display cfm ma command. If information about the MA is displayed, it means that the configuration succeeds. <HUAWEI> display cfm ma md mdcustomer Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 542 MD Name : mdcustomer Level MA Name : mdcustomer1 RMEP ID VSI Name : vsi1 L2VC ID : -- : 0018-82aa-12ed CCM Receive : enabled Trigger-If-Down : disabled Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 543: Configuring Ethernet Cfm And 1+1 Protection Of Multicast Vlans

    Ethernet CFM can be used on working VLANs, detect connectivity faults of VLANs, and trigger protection switchover, which can implement 1+1 multicast VLAN protection. Context For details, refer to the chapter "Layer 2 Multicast Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - IP Multicast. 8.2.12 Setting the Trap Threshold for Bandwidth Consumption in...

  • Page 544: Associating Cfm With Vrrp

    (NPEs), NPE1 and NPE2 through two links. Between the two links, one is a working link and the other is a protection link. NPE1 and NPE2 back up each other. CFM is deployed between Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 545 Before associating CFM with VRRP, complete the following tasks: Configure CFM. Configure VRRP. Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Step 2 Run: oam-mgr The MGR view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 546: Maintaining Ethernet Oam

    Run the display cfm error-packet statistics [ md md-name [ ma ma-name [ remote-mep mep-id mep-id ] ] ] command in any view to check statistics of error CCMs received on the device. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 547: Configuration Examples

    B, and Router D. ISP 2 manages Router C, Router E, Router F, Router G, Router H, and Router I. It is required that connectivity detection be implemented on the network. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 548 Create MEPs and RMEPs on Router H and Router G in MA 2 within MD 1. Create MEPs and RMEPs on Router A, Router C, and Router D in MA 3 within MD 2. Enable the sending and receiving of CCMs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 549 # Create MD 2 on Router A. Create and configure MA 3 within MD 2. [RouterA] cfm md md2 level 4 [RouterA-md-md2] ma ma3 [RouterA-md-md2-ma-ma3] map vlan 4 [RouterA-md-md2-ma-ma3] quit [RouterA-md-md2] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 550 # Configure a MEP on Router A in MA 3 within MD 2. [RouterA] cfm md md2 [RouterA-md-md2] ma ma3 [RouterA-md-md2-ma-ma3] mep mep-id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 inward Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 551 2 to 4 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 portswitch port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 portswitch port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 552 2 to 4 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 portswitch port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4 cfm md md1 level 6 ma ma1 map vlan 2 ma ma2 map vlan 3 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 553 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 portswitch port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 cfm md md1 level 6 ma ma1 map vlan 2 mep mep-id 3 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 inward Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 554 2 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 inward mep ccm-send mep-id 2 enable remote-mep mep-id 1 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 1 enable return Configuration file of Router H sysname RouterH vlan batch 2 to 3 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 555 This section describes the example for configuring the Ethernet CFM function to monitor the end-to-end connectivity in a scenario where the Layer 2 network accesses the Layer 3 network. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 556 Step 1 Configure a VPLS connection. Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2. For details, see the section "VPLS Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or the configuration files of the configuration example. After the preceding configuration completes, run the display vsi name vsi-name verbose command on PE1 to view VSI and PW information.
  • Page 557 After the preceding configuration completes, run the display vsi name vsi-name verbose command on PE2 to view VSI and PW information. <PE2>display vsi name ldp1 verbose ***VSI Name : ldp1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 558 : GigabitEthernet1/0/3 Backup OutInterface Stp Enable Mac Flapping PW Last Up Time : 2000/01/01 02:11:03 PW Total Up Time : 3 days, 22 hours, 27 minutes, 35 seconds Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 559 [PE4-md-md-ma-ma] mep mep-id 3 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2.1 vlan 2 outward [PE4-md-md-ma-ma] mep ccm-send mep-id 3 enable [PE4-md-md-ma-ma] remote-mep mep-id 1 [PE4-md-md-ma-ma] remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 1 enable [PE4-md-md-ma-ma] remote-mep mep-id 2 [PE4-md-md-ma-ma] remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 2 enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 560 : up MD Name : md Level MA Name : ma RMEP ID VLAN ID : -- VSI Name : -- L2VC ID : -- : -- Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 561 2 enable remote-mep mep-id remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 3 enable return Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 cfm version standard enable mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1 mpls mpls l2vpn Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 562 PE3 cfm version standard enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2.1 vlan-type dot1q cfm md mep mep-id 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2.1 vlan 2 outward mep ccm-send mep-id 2 enable remote-mep mep-id Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 563 D, Router E, and Router F are managed by ISP2. To enable the CFM function, you can configure the default MD on the device configured with an MD of a low level. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 564 Create and configure MEPs and RMEPs in MA2 within MD1 of Router A and Router E. Enable the CCM transmission function. Data Preparation To complete the configuration, you need the following data: Range of VLAN IDs to which interfaces belong Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 565 The configurations on Router C are the same as the configurations on Router B, and are not mentioned here. Step 5 Create the default MD and associate the default MD with VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 on Router B and Router C. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 566 [RouterA-md-md1] ma ma1 [RouterA-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep mep-id 2 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 inward # Create and configure a MEP in MA1 within MD1 on Router F. [RouterF] cfm md md1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 567 Perform the 802.1ag MAC trace operation on Router A. You can view that the 802.1ag MAC trace operation is successful and no connectivity fault occurs between Router A and Router E Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 568 2 enable remote-mep mep-id 1 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 1 enable ma ma2 map vlan 3 mep mep-id 1 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2 inward mep ccm-send mep-id 1 enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 569 6 mip create-type default vlan 2 to 3 return Configuration file of Router D sysname RouterD vlan batch 2 to 3 cfm version standard cfm enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 570 1 enable return Configuration file of Router F sysname RouterF vlan batch 2 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown portswitch port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 571 Figure 8-15 Diagram of associating Ethernet CFM with an interface ISP network RouterB GE1/0/3 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/2 GE1/0/2 GE1/0/3 GE1/0/1 RouterA User network 1 Active link Inactive link Link aggregation group in static LACP mode Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 572 GE 1/0/1, GE 1/0/2, and GE 1/0/3. Procedure Step 1 Configure the aggregation group in static LACP mode. For details, refer to the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access. Step 2 Configure Ethernet CFM.
  • Page 573 : ma2 MA Name Format : string MEP ID VLAN ID : -- VSI Name : -- Interface Name : GigabitEthernet1/0/2 CCM Send : enabled Direction : outward Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 574 # Associate Ethernet CFM with the member interfaces of Eth-Trunk 2 on Router A. [RouterA] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] cfm md md1 ma ma1 remote-mep mep-id 1 trigger if-down [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit [RouterA] interface gigabitethernet1/0/2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 575 RMEP ID VLAN ID : -- VSI Name : -- L2VC ID : -- : -- CCM Receive : enabled Trigger-If-Down : enabled CFM Status : up Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 576 5 enable return Configuration file of Router B sysname RouterB lacp priority 100 cfm enable interface Eth-Trunk2 portswitch mode lacp-static max bandwidth-affected-linknumber 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 577 A and Router B, Ethernet CFM is triggered to send alarms of the fault to Router D.When a fault occurs on the link between Router C and Router D, Ethernet CFM is triggered to send alarms of the fault to Router A. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 578 [RouterB] cfm md md1 [RouterB-md-md1] ma ma1 [RouterB-md-md1-ma-ma1] map vlan 10 [RouterB-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep mep-id 1 interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0 outward [RouterB-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep mep-id 2 [RouterB-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep ccm-send enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 579 Ethernet CFM notifies EFM OAM running between Router C and Router D of the faults. ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of Router A sysname RouterA vlan batch 10 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 580 GigabitEthernet1/0/0 portswitch port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map vlan 10 mep mep-id 2 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 outward mep ccm-send enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 581 8-17, Martini VPLS runs on the backbone network and LDP is used as signaling to create Pseudo Wires (PWs). Configure VPLS Ethernet CFM on PEs to fast detect VPLS connectivity between PEs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 582 To complete the configuration, you need the following data: IP address of each interface MPLS LSR ID of each PE VSI name and VSI ID of each PE Interfaces bound to the VSI Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 583 IGP protocol in this example. NOTE When configuring OSPF, advertise the 32-bit addresses of loopback interfaces on PEs. # Configure PE1. [PE1] ospf 1 [PE1-ospf-1] area 0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 584 [PE1-mpls] quit [PE1] mpls ldp [PE1-mpls-ldp] quit [PE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0 [PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls [PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls ldp [PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit [PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 [PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls [PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] mpls ldp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 585 LDP sessions between PEs. Step 4 Enable MPLS L2VPN on PEs. # Configure PE1. [PE1] mpls l2vpn [PE1-l2vpn] quit # Configure PE2. [PE2] mpls l2vpn [PE2-l2vpn] quit # Configure PE3. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 586 <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname CE1 [CE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0.1 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] vlan-type dot1q 10 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] ip address 10.1.1.1 24 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] undo shutdown [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] quit # Configure CE2. <HUAWEI> system-view Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 587 Hosts attached to CE1, CE2, and CE3 can ping through each other. Take CE1 as an example. [CE1] ping 10.1.1.2 PING 10.1.1.2: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break Reply from 10.1.1.2: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=255 time=50 ms Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 588 [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep mep-id 3 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0.1 inward [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep mep-id 1 [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep mep-id 2 [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep ccm-send enable [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep ccm-receive enable [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] quit Step 8 Verify the configuration. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 589 : -- : -- CCM Receive : enabled Trigger-If-Down : disabled CFM Status : up Alarm Status : None Interface TLV : disabled Connect Status : up ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 590 3 enable ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3 network 10.2.1.0 0.0.0.3 return Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 cfm enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 591 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.3 network 10.3.1.0 0.0.0.3 return Configuration file of PE3 sysname PE3 cfm enable mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 592 Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 undo shutdown vlan-type dot1q 10 ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 return Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 593 AC interface of each PE and is bound to a VSI, and then is enabled with VPLS-based Ethernet CFM to fast detect connectivity of the VPLS between PEs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 594 Set up an LSP tunnel between PEs. Enable MPLS L2VPN on each PE. Configure a sub-interface for QinQ VLAN tag termination on the AC interface of each PE. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 595 32-bit loopback address of each PE must be advertised. # Configure PE1. [PE1] interface loopback 1 [PE1-LoopBack1] ip address 1.1.1.1 32 [PE1-LoopBack1] quit [PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 10.1.3.1 30 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 596 <PE1> display ip routing-table Route Flags: R - relied, D - download to fib ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 12 Routes : 13 Destination/Mask Proto Cost Flags NextHop Interface Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 597 [PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mpls [PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mpls ldp [PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit # Configure PE3. [PE3] mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3 [PE3] mpls [PE3-mpls] quit [PE3] mpls ldp [PE3-mpls-ldp] quit [PE3] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 598 [PE2] vsi ldp1 static [PE2-vsi-ldp1] pwsignal ldp [PE2-vsi-ldp1-ldp] vsi-id 2 [PE2-vsi-ldp1-ldp] peer 1.1.1.1 [PE2-vsi-ldp1-ldp] peer 3.3.3.3 # Configure PE3. [PE3] vsi ldp1 static [PE3-vsi-ldp1] pwsignal ldp [PE3-vsi-ldp1-ldp] vsi-id 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 599 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep ccm-receive enable [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] quit # Configure PE2. [PE2] cfm enable [PE2] cfm version standard [PE2] cfm md md1 [PE2-md-md1] ma ma1 [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] ccm-interval 30 [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] map vsi ldp1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 600 # Configure Switch3. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname Switch3 [Switch3] vlan 100 [Switch3-vlan100] quit [Switch3] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [Switch3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] undo shutdown [Switch3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] port trunk allow-pass vlan 100 [Switch3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 601 VLAN ID : -- VSI Name : ldp1 L2VC ID : -- Interface Name : GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1 CCM Send : enabled Direction : inward MAC Address : 00e0-fc6e-bb11 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 602 1.1.1.1 mpls mpls l2vpn vsi ldp1 static pwsignal ldp vsi-id 2 peer 2.2.2.2 peer 3.3.3.3 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown mode user-termination interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1 undo shutdown Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 603 2 peer 1.1.1.1 peer 3.3.3.3 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown mode user-termination interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1 undo shutdown control-vid 1 qinq-termination qinq termination l2 symmetry Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 604 GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown mode user-termination interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0.1 undo shutdown control-vid 1 qinq-termination qinq termination l2 symmetry qinq termination pe-vid 100 ce-vid 10 l2 binding vsi ldp1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 605 Configuration file of Switch2 sysname Switch2 vlan batch 100 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 undo shutdown port trunk allow-pass vlan 100 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown port vlan-stacking vlan 10 stack-vlan 100 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 606 Tag 100 to the frames sent by the CE. In this manner, the IDs of VLANs on the public network are saved. Then, the switch sends user frames with Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 607 Enable Layer 2 forwarding and QinQ on each switch. Data Preparation To complete the configuration, you need the following data: Interface name of each PE connected to each CE IP address of each interface Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 608 [P-LoopBack1] ip address 2.2.2.9 32 [P-LoopBack1] quit [P] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.2 24 [P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] undo shutdown [P-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit [P] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0 [P-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] ip address 10.1.2.1 24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 609 = 60/106/200 ms Step 3 Enable MPLS and LDP on the MPLS backbone network. # Configure PE1. [PE1] mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.9 [PE1] mpls [PE1-mpls] quit [PE1] mpls ldp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 610 Step 4 Create a remote LDP session between PEs. # Configure PE1. [PE1] mpls ldp remote-peer 3.3.3.9 [PE1-mpls-ldp-remote-3.3.3.9] remote-ip 3.3.3.9 [PE1-mpls-ldp-remote-3.3.3.9] quit # Configure PE2. [PE2] mpls ldp remote-peer 1.1.1.9 [PE2-mpls-ldp-remote-1.1.1.9] remote-ip 1.1.1.9 [PE2-mpls-ldp-remote-1.1.1.9] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 611 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep mep-id 1 interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0.1 pe-vid 100 ce- vid 10 inward [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep mep-id 2 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep ccm-send enable [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep ccm-receive enable [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 612 # Configure CE1. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname CE1 [CE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0.1 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] ip address 10.1.1.1 24 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] vlan-type dot1q 10 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1] undo shutdown Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 613 : disabled CFM Status : up Alarm Status : None Interface TLV : disabled Connect Status : up ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 614 Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.9 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls ldp remote-peer 1.1.1.9 remote-ip 1.1.1.9 interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0 undo shutdown mode user-termination Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 615 LoopBack1 ip address 2.2.2.9 255.255.255.255 ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 2.2.2.9 0.0.0.0 network 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 return Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 616 On the provider network shown in Figure 8-20, NPEs and P are connected through Ethernet links; UPEs and NPEs are connected through Ethernet links. The requirements are as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 617 Configure the IP address and mask for each interface including each loopback interface as shown Figure 8-20. The detailed configuration is omitted here. For details, see "Configuration Files." Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 618 # Configure NPE2. [NPE2] isis 1 [NPE2-isis-1] network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0003.00 [NPE2-isis-1] is-level level-2 [NPE2-isis-1] quit [NPE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] isis enable 1 [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] undo shutdown [NPE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 619 [NPE1-mpls] mpls rsvp-te [NPE1-mpls] mpls te cspf [NPE1-mpls] quit [NPE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0 [NPE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls [NPE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls te [NPE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] mpls rsvp-te [NPE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit [NPE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 620 # Configure NPE2. [NPE2] isis 1 [NPE2-isis-1] cost-style wide [NPE2-isis-1] traffic-eng level-2 [NPE2-isis-1] quit Step 5 Use explicit paths to set up TE tunnels on NPEs. # Configure NPE1. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 621 After the preceding configuration, you can use the command to view the parameters and status of MPLS OAM on the ingress NPE1 and egress NPE2. The command output shows that the ingress and egress are in normal detection state. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 622 You can view that the status of EFM OAM on GE 1/0/0 is detect. Take the display on UPE2 as an example. [UPE2] display efm session interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 Interface EFM State Loopback Timeout -------------------------------------------------------------------- GigabitEthernet1/0/0 detect Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 623 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 isis enable 1 return Configuration file of NPE1 sysname NPE1 efm enable mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp-te mpls oam mpls te cspf Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 624 GigabitEthernet 1/0/0 egress mpls oam Tunnel 2/0/0 return Configuration file of P sysname P mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp-te isis 1 is-level level-2 cost-style wide network-entity 00.0005.0000.0000.0004.00 traffic-eng level-2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 625 100.2.1.2 255.255.255.252 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp-te interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 100.4.1.1 255.255.255.252 isis enable 1 mpls mpls te mpls rsvp-te interface LoopBack1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 626 PEs, you can use the master device to transmit network traffic. Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E/40E. As shown in Figure 8-21. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 627 Configure Multiprotocol Interior Border Gateway Protocol (MP IBGP) between PEs to exchange VPN routing information. Enable EFM OAM extension between PE1 and CE1, and between PE2 and CE1. Then associate EFM OAM extension with interfaces. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 628 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] portswitch [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit [CE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0 [CE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] portswitch [CE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit [CE1-vlan10] port gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [CE1-vlan10] port gigabitethernet 2/0/0 [CE1-vlan10] interface vlanif10 [CE1-vlanif10] ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 629 [PE1] mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2 [PE1] mpls [PE1-mpls] quit [PE1] mpls ldp [PE1-ldp] quit [PE1] interface pos 1/0/0 [PE1-Pos1/0/0] mpls [PE1-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp [PE1-Pos1/0/0] quit # Configure PE2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 630 # Configure PE1. [PE1] efm enable [PE1] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 [PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] efm enable [PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] efm trigger if-down [PE1-GigabitEthernet3/0/0] quit # Configure PE2. [PE2] efm enable [PE2] interface gigabitethernet 3/0/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 631 [PE3-bgp] peer 2.2.2.2 connect-interface loopback 1 [PE3-bgp] peer 3.3.3.3 as-number 100 [PE3-bgp] peer 3.3.3.3 connect-interface loopback 1 [PE3-bgp] ipv4-family vpnv4 [PE3-bgp] peer 2.2.2.2 enable [PE3-bgp] peer 3.3.3.3 enable [PE3-bgp] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 632 PE2 is Backup. That is, PE1 functions as the master PE, and is responsible for forwarding traffic. PE2 functions as the backup PE, and cannot forward traffic. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 633 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 10.1.1.111 vrrp vrid 1 track interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0 reduced 60 ip binding vpn-instance vpna interface Pos1/0/0 link-protocol ppp ip address 100.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 634 10.1.1.3 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 10.1.1.111 vrrp vrid 1 track interface GigabitEthernet3/0/0 reduced 60 ip binding vpn-instance vpna interface Pos1/0/0 link-protocol ppp ip address 100.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 635 Pos1/0/0 link-protocol ppp ip address 100.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos2/0/0 link-protocol ppp ip address 100.2.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 4.4.4.4 255.255.255.255 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 636 CEs, you can implement the link protection switchover. Networking Requirements NOTE POS interfaces cannot be configured on the X1 and X2 models of the NE80E/40E. Figure 8-22 shows the networking requirements: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 637 OAM extension for static routes, and import the static routes to BGP. Data Preparation To complete the configuration, you need the following data: IP address of each physical interface Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 638 After the configuration, IS-IS neighbor relationships are set up between PE1, PE2, and PE3. Run the display ip routing-table command. The command output shows that the PEs learn the Loopback1 route from each other. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 639 [PE2] interface pos 1/0/0 [PE2-Pos1/0/0] mpls [PE2-Pos1/0/0] mpls ldp [PE2-Pos1/0/0] quit [PE2] interface pos 2/0/0 [PE2-Pos2/0/0] mpls [PE2-Pos2/0/0] mpls ldp [PE2-Pos2/0/0] quit # Configure PE3. [PE3] mpls lsr-id 4.4.4.4 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 640 # Configure CE1. Note that the IP addresses of the interfaces on the master and slave interface boards are the same. [CE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.1 24 [CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit [CE1] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/0 [CE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.1 24 [CE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 641 OAM extension for static routes, and import the static routes to BGP. # Configure PE1. [PE1] ip route-static vpn-instance vpna 1.1.1.1 32 10.1.1.1 track efm-state gigabitethernet 3/0/0 [PE1] bgp 100 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 642 BGP local router ID : 2.2.2.2 Local AS number : 100 Total number of peers : 2 Peers in established state : 2 Peer MsgRcvd MsgSent OutQ Up/Down State PrefRcv Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 643 Routes : 8 Destination/Mask Proto Cost Flags NextHop Interface 1.1.1.1/32 3.3.3.9 GigabitEthernet3/0/0 10.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 10.1.1.2 GigabitEthernet3/0/0 10.1.1.2/32 Direct 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 10.1.1.255/32 Direct 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 644 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 efm enable interface Pos1/0/0 link-protocol ppp ip address 100.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos2/0/0 link-protocol ppp ip address 100.3.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 645 100.2.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface Pos2/0/0 link-protocol ppp ip address 100.3.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack1 ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 bgp 100 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 646 3.3.3.3 as-number 100 peer 3.3.3.3 connect-interface LoopBack1 ipv4-family unicast peer 2.2.2.2 enable peer 3.3.3.3 enable ipv4-family vpnv4 policy vpn-target peer 2.2.2.2 enable peer 3.3.3.3 enable return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 647 8-23, VRRP can be used on network provider edges (NPEs) to support downstream user access through gateways, and CFM can be used on user- end provider edges (UPEs) to detect link failures. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 648 VRRP status from Backup to Master after a delay three times the interval at which VRRP packets are sent. This ensures that only one master device is in the VRRP backup group. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 649 VRRP can be associated with CFM, peer BFD, and direct routes to implement VRRP switchovers quickly, and to ensure consistent uplink and downlink traffic paths should a link failure occur. Figure 8-24 shows the network topology. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 650 The uplink traffic path changes from UPE2 -> UPE1 -> NPE1 to UPE2 -> UPE3 -> NPE2, and the downlink traffic path changes from PE1 -> NPE1 to PE1 -> NPE2. Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 651 [NPE2-gigabitethernet1/0/0.1] quit [NPE2] cfm md mdforvrrp [NPE2-md-mdforvrrp] ma ma2 [NPE2-md-mdforvrrp-ma-ma2] mep mep-id 4 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/0.1 vlan 2 outward [NPE2-md-mdforvrrp-ma-ma2] remote-mep mep-id 3 [NPE2-md-mdforvrrp-ma-ma2] remote-mep ccm-receive enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 652 [UPE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 [UPE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit [UPE3] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0 [UPE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] undo shutdown [UPE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] portswitch [UPE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 [UPE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit Step 2 Verify the CFM configuration. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 653 Virtual IP : 192.168.1.11 Master IP : 192.168.1.2 PriorityRun : 200 PriorityConfig : 200 MasterPriority : 200 Preempt : YES Delay Time : 0 s TimerRun : 1 s Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 654 [NPE1] display bfd session all -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Local Remote PeerIpAddr State Type InterfaceName -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 192.168.1.3 S_IP_IF GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total UP/DOWN Session Number : 1/0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 655 Destinations : 19 Routes : 19 Destination/Mask Proto Cost Flags NextHop Interface 10.137.0.0/16 Static 10.137.130.1 GigabitEthernet0/0/0 10.137.130.0/23 Static 10.137.130.1 GigabitEthernet0/0/0 10.137.130.0/24 Direct 10.137.130.47 GigabitEthernet0/0/0 10.137.130.47/32 Direct 127.0.0.1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 656 Run the display vrrp command on each NPE to verify the configuration. Information about the association between VRRP and peer BFD is displayed. [NPE2] display vrrp GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 | Virtual Router 1 State : Master Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 657 [NPE2] display vrrp GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 | Virtual Router 1 State : Master Virtual IP : 192.168.1.11 Master IP : 192.168.1.3 PriorityRun : 100 PriorityConfig : 100 MasterPriority : 100 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 658 Direct 192.168.3.2 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 192.168.3.2/32 Direct 127.0.0.1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 192.168.3.255/32 Direct 127.0.0.1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 255.255.255.255/32 Direct 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 cfm version standard Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 659 GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 vlan-type dot1q ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 192.168.1.11 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd-session 1 peer direct-route track vrrp vrid 1 degrade-cost interface Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 660 1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 return Configuration file of UPE2 sysname UPE2 cfm version standard enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 portswitch undo shutdown port trunk allow-pass vlan interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 661 255.255.255.0 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0.1 vlan-type dot1q ip address 192.168.1.3 255.255.255.0 vrrp vrid 1 virtual-ip 192.168.1.11 vrrp vrid 1 track bfd-session 2 peer direct-route track vrrp vrid 1 degrade-cost Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 662 3 enable return Configuration file of UPE1 sysname UPE1 FTP server enable cfm version standard enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 portswitch undo shutdown Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 663: Efm Configuration

    EFM is a feature for detecting network faults in the first-mile direct Ethernet link. Introduction EFM effectively improves Ethernet management and maintenance capabilities and ensures the stable operation of networks. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 664 EFM works on the data link layer. EFM uses EFM OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDUs) to report link status so that administrators can effectively manage Ethernet networks. Table 8-12 lists OAMPDU types and functions. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 665 8-13, the local EFM entity sends an event notification OAMPDU to notify the remote EFM entity. This mechanism helps network administrators to keep track of network status. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 666 This section describes EFM features supported by the NE80E/40E. Familiarizing yourself with these features helps you complete the configuration tasks quickly and efficiently. EFM is link-level OAM, and provides the following functions: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 667 CE1 and CE2 based on association between EFM and Port1 or Port2. Figure 8-26 Association between EFM and interfaces DSLAM Port1 Metro User Network Port2 Association between EFM and detection protocols Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 668 Table 8-15 lists associations between EFM and protocols and their usage scenarios. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 669: Configuring Basic Efm Functions

    VRRP switchover. VRRP 8.3.2 Configuring Basic EFM Functions After basic EFM functions are configured, the connectivity of physical links can be monitored. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 670: Establishing The Configuration Task

    OAMPDUs are received Enabling EFM Globally Enabling EFM globally is the prerequisite for configuring basic EFM functions. Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 671 Step 3 Run: efm mode { active | passive } An EFM mode is configured for the interface. By default, an interface works in active EFM mode. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 672 OAMPDU size. By adjusting the maximum OAMPDU size, you can enable Huawei devices to communicate with non-Huawei devices. Perform the following steps on the interfaces at both ends of a link: Procedure Set the maximum EFM OAMPDU size.
  • Page 673 The interval at which EFM OAMPDUs are received is configured on an interface after EFM is enabled globally but before EFM is enabled on the interface. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 674 Run the display efm command to view all EFM configurations on the local interface and some EFM configurations on the remote interface. <HUAWEI> display efm interface gigabitethernet2/0/1 Item Value ---------------------------------------------------- Interface: GigabitEthernet2/0/1 EFM Enable Flag: enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 675: Configuring Link Monitoring

    If the configurations are correct, the two interfaces enter the handshake stage. Run the display efm session command, and you can see that the EFM status is detect. <HUAWEI> display efm session interface gigabitethernet2/0/1 Interface EFM State Loopback Timeout...
  • Page 676 The device then notifies its remote device of the event. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 677 The interface is enabled to report symbol errors. By default, an interface is disabled from reporting symbol errors. Detect errored frame events. Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 678 1 on the interface. Run: efm error-frame-second notification enable The interface is enabled to report errored frame seconds. By default, an interface is disabled from reporting errored frame seconds. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 679: Configuring Remote Loopback

    8-29, remote loopback is configured on the interface connecting the CE to the PE. The interface sends test packets to its remote interface. The packet loss ratio Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 680 To keep a link in the remote loopback state, set the timeout period to 0. When the transmit parameter is configured and EFM remote loopback is initialized, the initiator keeps transparently transmitting packets without blocking them. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 681 Step 3 Configure the interface in active EFM mode to send test packets. Run: test-packet start interface interface-type interface-number [ -c count | -p speed | -s size ] The device is configured to sent test packets. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 682 The command output shows that the EFM status on the interface is Loopback (control), indicating that the interface initiates the remote loopback process. <HUAWEI> display efm session interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 Interface EFM State Loopback Timeout...

  • Page 683: Configuring Remote Fault Indication

    After remote loopback is disabled, run the display efm session command on either of the devices on the link. The command output shows that the EFM status on the interfaces connecting the two devices is Detect or Discovery. <HUAWEI> display efm session interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 Interface EFM State...
  • Page 684 Unicast: 0 packets, Multicast: 0 packets Broadcast: 0 packets Output: Unicast: 0 packets, Multicast: 0 packets Broadcast: 0 packets Input bandwidth utilization : 0.00% Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00% Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 685: Configuring Efm Association Functions

    – Configure basic MPLS OAM functions if EFM is associated with MPLS OAM. – Configure basic VRRP functions if EFM is associated with VRRP. Data Preparation To configure EFM association functions, you need the following data. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 686 Before configuring association between EFM and CFM, complete the following tasks: Configure basic EFM functions. Configure basic CFM functions. Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Step 2 Run: oam-mgr Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 687 Static BFD for LSP (LDP, TE, TE-LSP, static-LSP, and VLL PW) sessions (a PST is required) BFD for IP sessions (no PST is required) Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring association between EFM and BFD, complete the following tasks: Configure basic EFM functions. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 688 When MPLS OAM detects a link fault, it will notify EFM of the fault. Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring association between EFM and MPLS OAM, complete the following tasks: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 689: Maintaining Efm

    When an EFM fault occurs, run the debugging command in the user view to debug EFM, and locate and analyze the fault. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 690: Configuration Examples

    Metro User Core Network GE1/0/2 GE2/0/1 GE1/0/2 Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Configure basic EFM functions on CE1 and CE4 to monitor link connectivity. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 691 Run the display efm session { all | interface interface-type interface-num } command on CE1 or CE4. The command output shows that the EFM state is detect on GE 1/0/2 or GE 2/0/1. [CE1] display efm session all Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 692 } command on CE1 or CE4. The command output shows that the EFM status is Detect or Discovery on the interfaces at both ends of the link. For example: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 693 Loopback IgnoreRequest: OAMPDU MaxSize: OAMPDU Timeout: 5000 OAMPDU Interval: 1000 ErrCodeNotification: enable ErrCodePeriod: ErrCodeThreshold: ErrFrameNotification: enable ErrFramePeriod: ErrFrameThreshold: ErrFrameSecondNotification: enable ErrFrameSecondPeriod: ErrFrameSecondThreshold: Hold Up Time: ThresholdEvtTriggerErrDown: disable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 694 Broadcast: 0 packets Input bandwidth utilization : 0.00% Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00% ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 695 Network environments and user requirements, therefore, need to be properly analyzed, and various detection techniques are required to implement rapid link fault detection. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 696 Procedure Step 1 Configure basic EFM functions. # Enable EFM on CE1. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname CE1 [CE1] efm enable # Enable EFM on CE4. <HUAWEI> system-view Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 697 CE1 to simulate a fault in the link between CE1 and CE4. Run the display interface interface- type interface-num command on GE 1/0/3 of CE3. The command output shows that the current state field value is DOWN (EFM down). [CE3] display interface gigabitethernet1/0/3 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 698 Configuration file of CE4 sysname CE4 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown enable oam- oam-bind ingress efm interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 egress efm interface Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 699 When the link between PE3 and PE4 goes faulty, CE1 or CE2 can detect the fault. If the link between CE1 and PE3 goes faulty, a master/backup link switchover can be implemented. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 700 Step 1 Configure basic EFM functions. # Enable EFM on CE1. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname CE1 [CE1] efm enable # Enable EFM on CE2. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname CE2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 701 [PE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 [PE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit [PE3] cfm md md1 [PE3-md-md1] ma ma1 [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] map vlan 2 [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep mep-id 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 outward [PE3-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep mep-id 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 702 [PE4-oam-mgr] oam-bind cfm md md1 ma ma1 efm interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 [PE4-oam-mgr] quit Step 4 Configure association between EFM and interfaces on CE2. [CE2] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 [CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] efm trigger if-down [CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 703 Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown efm enable return Configuration file of PE3 sysname PE3 vlan batch enable enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 704 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 return Configuration file of PE4 sysname PE4 vlan batch enable enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 portswitch undo shutdown port trunk allow-pass vlan Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 705 8-36, CE1 is dual-homed to PE1 and PE3. The requirements on the network are as follows: The connectivity of links between CE1 and PE3, between PE3 and PE4, and PE4 and CE2 needs to be monitored. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 706 To complete the configuration, you need the following data: Local and remote discriminators of a BFD session VLAN ID Procedure Step 1 Configure basic EFM functions. # Enable EFM on CE1. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 707 Step 2 Configure basic BFD functions. BFD for IP is used as an example for configuring basic BFD functions. # Configure basic BFD functions on PE3. [PE3] bfd Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 708 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 current state : UP Line protocol current state : DOWN (EFM down) Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet1/0/0 Interface Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500 Internet protocol processing : disabled Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 709 PE3 enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 interface NULL0 bfd pe3tope4 bind peer-ip 10.1.1.2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 discriminator local Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 710 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 egress bfd-session oam-bind ingress bfd-session 2 egress efm interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 return Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 711 10.1.4.1/24 GE1/0/2 GE1/0/1 User User GE1/0/1 GE1/0/2 Network Network GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/2 10.1.2.1/24 10.1.3.2/24 GE1/0/2 GE1/0/1 GE2/0/1 10.1.2.2/24 10.1.3.1/24 Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1 1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32 MPLS OAM Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 712 [PE3] isis [PE3-isis-1] isis [PE3-isis-1] network-entity 10.0000.0000.0003.00 [PE3-isis-1] quit [PE3] interface LoopBack 1 [PE3-LoopBack1] isis enable 1 [PE3-LoopBack1] quit [PE3] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 [PE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] isis enable 1 [PE3-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 713 [PE1] mpls [PE1-mpls] mpls te [PE1-mpls] quit [PE1] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 [PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mpls [PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mpls te [PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit [PE1] interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1 [PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] mpls [PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] mpls te [PE1-GigabitEthernet2/0/1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 714 [PE3-Tunnel1/0/2] destination 1.1.1.1 [PE3-Tunnel1/0/2] mpls te tunnel-id 100 [PE3-Tunnel1/0/2] mpls te signal-protocol cr-static [PE3-Tunnel1/0/2] mpls te commit [PE3-Tunnel1/0/2] quit # Configure PE3 as the ingress of the static CR-LSP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 715 After completing the configuration, view the MPLS OAM parameters and the OAM status on ingress PE1 and egress PE3. OAM is working properly on both the ingress and egress and does not detect a fault in the CR-LSP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 716 : Available Unavailable time (s): 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total OAM Num: Total Start OAM Num: Total Defect OAM Num: Total Unavailable OAM Num: Step 6 Configure EFM functions. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 717 [CE2] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 [CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] efm trigger if-down [CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit Step 8 Associate EFM with MPLS OAM on the ingress. # Associate EFM with MPLS OAM on PE1. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 718 Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00% ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown efm enable return Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 719 GigabitEthernet2/0/0 shutdown interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 isis enable mpls mpls interface NULL0 interface LoopBack1 ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 isis enable interface Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 720 Tunnel2/0/0 user-interface con user-interface vty 0 user-interface vty 16 return Configuration file of PE4 sysname PE4 mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2 mpls mpls authentication-scheme default authorization-scheme default accounting-scheme default Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 721 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 in-label 20 nexthop 10.1.3.2 out-label static-cr-lsp transit Tunnel1/0/2 incoming-interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1 in- label 70 nexthop 10.1.2.1 out-label 80 bandwidth ct0 user-interface con user-interface vty 0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 722 10.0000.0000.0003.00 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0 shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.3.2 255.255.255.0 isis enable mpls mpls interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 723 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 user-interface con user-interface vty 0 user-interface vty 16 return Configuration file of CE2 sysname CE2 efm enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown efm enable efm trigger if-down Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 724 Figure 8-38 Example for associating a VRRP backup group with an EFM session GE1/0/1 RouterA 10.1.1.1/24 EFM for VRRP Switch1 DSLAM BFD for VRRP IP/MPLS Core EFM for VRRP Switch2 GE1/0/1 RouterB 10.1.1.2/24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 725 # Create VRRP backup group 10 and set the VRRP priority to 160 on Router A so that Router A is the Master. [RouterA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] vrrp vrid 10 virtual-ip 10.1.1.111 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] vrrp vrid 10 priority 160 [RouterA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 726 # After completing the preceding configurations, run the display vrrp command on Router A and Router B. The VRRP status is Master on Router A and Backup on Router B. The command Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 727 # Run the display vrrp command on Router A. The VRRP status is Initialize on Router A. [RouterA] display vrrp GigabitEthernet1/0/1 | Virtual Router 10 State : Initialize Virtual IP : 10.1.1.111 Master IP : 0.0.0.0 PriorityRun : 160 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 728 10 virtual-ip 10.1.1.111 vrrp vrid 10 priority 160 vrrp vrid 10 track efm interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 efm enable efm error-frame period 5 efm error-frame threshold 5 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 729 GigabitEthernet1/1/4 portswitch undo shutdown port default vlan 10 efm enable efm error-frame period 5 efm error-frame threshold 5 efm error-frame notification enable efm error-frame-second period 120 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 730: Configuration

    Hierarchical Ethernet OAM needs to be provided based on the network architecture, as shown Figure 8-39. Figure 8-39 Networking diagram for Ethernet OAM Services Access Metro Core Access Link OAM CFM/Y.1731 Connectivity Layer OAM Service CFM/Y.1731 Layer OAM Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 731 After receiving the ETH-LMM, the remote MEP replies with an ETH-LMR (a frame containing ETH-LM response information). After receiving the ETH-LMR, the local MEP obtains corresponding measurement information based on message contents and calculates the frame loss ratio. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 732 Each MEP obtains corresponding measurement information based on contents in the CCMs and calculates frame loss ratios. Figure 8-41 Networking diagram for dual-ended frame loss measurement ETH-CCM ETH-CCM VLL/VPLS Y.1731 Single-ended synthetic loss measurement (SLM) Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 733 Frame delay = RxTimef - TxTimeStampf Figure 8-43 Networking diagram for one-way frame delay measurement 1DM PDU VLL/VPLS Y.1731 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 734 AIS packet. After a period (3.5 times the period for sending AIS packets) expires, the alarm suppression function on the CEs is disabled automatically. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 735 Multicast MAC ping is initiated by the local MEP and responded to by the remote MEP. Figure 8-46 Networking diagram for multicast MAC ping MEP2 MEP1 MEP3 LBM data flow LBR data flow Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 736 Before configuring a unidirectional delay, synchronize the clock frequency between the two ends. For details about frequency synchronization configuration, see the chapter "1588v2 Configuration" in Configuration Guide-System Management. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 737 MEPs in the scenario where multiple MEPs are used. l Multicast loopback is used to discover RMEPs if RMEP IDs and MAC addresses cannot be obtained. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 738: Configuring Y.1731 Functions In Vll Networking

    MEP supports only one-way frame DM, two-way frame DM, single-ended SLM, and multicast MAC ping. Figure 8-47 Networking diagram for configuring Y.1731 functions in VLL networking User User Network Network Y.1731 Y.1731 Y.1731 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 739 Interval at which frames are sent and number of sent frames during two-way frame delay measurement (Optional) the interval for sending AIS packets Interval and number at which multicast MAC Ping frames are sent Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 740 MA cannot be associated with backup VC in 802.1ag. The interface of the raw type and the interface of the tagged type process packets in different manners, as shown in Table 8-20 Table 8-21. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 741 QinQ termination Adds an outer tag. Replaces the VLAN ID in the sub-interface (in outer tag contained in a packet symmetry mode) with the local VLAN ID. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 742 PE2 in time, causing incorrect frame loss statistics. 802.1p-priority-based single-ended frame loss measurement can be configured for the VLL for accurate proactive frame loss tests. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 743 { ac | pw } A measurement point for collecting Y.1731 statistics is configured. By default, a measurement point for collecting Y.1731 statistics is a PW interface. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 744 Run the loss-measure single-ended send mep mep-id [ mac mac- scenario address | remote-mep mep-id ] interval { 1000 | 10000 } count count-value command to enable on-demand single-ended frame loss measurement on a PW. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 745 { raw | tagged } The MA is bound to a specified L2VC. Run: mep mep-id The MEP is configured. Run: remote-mep mep-id mep-id The remote MEP ID is configured. Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 746 AC side. Single-ended frame loss measurement is implemented for the link between the local MEP and a remote MPE identified by an ID or a MAC address. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 747 Run: measure-point mep mep-id { ac | pw } The measure point is configured. By default, a measurement point for collecting Y.1731 statistics is a PW interface. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 748 2. Run the loss-measure single-ended receive test-id test-id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs. On the transmitting device of a PW where proactive single-ended frame loss measurement will be implemented, run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 749 After completing the configuration, run the display y1731 statistic-type scenario single-loss test-id test-id [ count count-value ] command on the PW- or AC- side MEP that initiates single-ended frame loss measurement and verify the configuration. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 750 NMS that matches the current device version. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view the statistics about single-ended frame loss. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type single-loss md md1 ma ma1 Latest single-ended loss statistics of 802.1p 1: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------...
  • Page 751 By default, a measurement point for collecting Y.1731 statistics is a PW interface. Run: remote-mep mep-id mep-id The remote MEP ID is configured. Run: mep ccm-send enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 752 Currently, you can check the configuration of dual-ended frame loss measurement in VLL networking by using the NMS that matches the current device version. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view statistics about dual-ended frame loss. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type dual-loss md md1 ma ma1 Latest dual-ended loss statistics: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------...
  • Page 753 Figure 8-49 Networking diagram for priority-based frame loss measurement on a VLL User User Y.1731 Network Network Priority 1 Priority 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 754 The remote MEP ID is configured. Run: mep ccm-send enable The CCM transmission function is enabled. This command can be configured only on an interface-based MEP. Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 755 { mac mac-address | remote-mep mep-id } interval interval count count-value On-demand one-way frame delay measurement is enabled on the device that is to send 1DMs on the PW side. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 756 The MA view is displayed. Run: map mpls l2vc vc-id { raw | tagged } The MA is bound to a specified L2VC. Configure a MEP according to Table 8-32. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 757 Non-test instance-based statistics collection by an interface-based point Run: delay-measure one-way continual receive mep mep-id [ 8021p { 8021p-value } &<1-3> ] The peer device is enabled to receive 1DMs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 758 NOTE Currently, you can check the configuration of one-way frame delay measurement on in VLL networking by using the NMS that matches the current device version. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 759 Configuration Guide - Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view statistics about the delay in unidirectional frame transmission . <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type oneway-delay md md1 ma ma1 Latest one-way delay statistics of 802.1p 1: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Index...
  • Page 760 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Run: cfm md md-name The MD view is displayed. Run: ma ma-name The MA view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 761 Table 8-36 DMM reception configuration Scenario Procedure Point-to- Non-test instance-based statistics collection by an interface-based point Run: delay-measure two-way receive mep mep-id The peer device is enabled to receive DMMs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 762 Perform the following steps on the devices at both ends of a PW where proactive two- way frame delay measurement will be implemented: Run: system-view The system view is displayed. (Optional) Run: y1731 pm-mode enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 763 PW-based MEP. Run: remote-mep mep-id mep-id The remote MEP ID is configured. Run: mep ccm-send enable The CCM transmission function is enabled. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 764 | remote-mep mep-id } interval interval [ 8021p { 8021p-value } &<1–3> ] Proactive two-way frame delay measurement is enabled on the device that is to send DMMs on the PW side. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 765 NMS that matches the current device version. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view statistics about the delay in bidirectional frame transmission. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type twoway-delay md md1 ma ma1 Latest two-way delay statistics of 802.1p 2: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------...
  • Page 766 Perform the following steps on the devices at both ends of a PW where single- ended on-demand SLM will be implemented: Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 767 The RMEP is enabled to receive SLM frames. Perform the following configuration on the MEP that sends SLM frames to initiate on-demand SLM on the PW side: Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 768 A test instance is created. Perform the following configuration on the RMEP that receives SLM frames on the AC side: Run: loss-measure single-ended-synthetic receive test-id test-id [ time-out timeout-value ] Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 769 { interface-type interface- interface- number | interface-type interface-number.subnumber } [ { pe- based MEP. vid pe-vid ce-vid ce-vid | vlan vlan-id } ] Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 770 [ count count ] command on the MEP that has been enabled to send SLM frames. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command. The command output shows statistics for single- ended SLM. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 771 HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type single-synthetic-loss test-id 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Index L-send R-send L-recv Unack L-loss R-loss L-loss-ratio R-loss-ratio -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1000 1000 1000 0.0000% 0.0000% 1000 1000 1000 0.0000% 0.0000% 1000...
  • Page 772 Procedure Step 1 Perform the following steps on a PE: Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Run: cfm md md-name The MD view is displayed. Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 773 The MD view is displayed. Run: ma ma-name The MA view is displayed. Run: map vlan vlan-id The MA is bound to the current VLAN. Run: ais enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 774 MA Name : ma2 MA Name Format : string Interval : 10000 Piority Vlan ID VSI Name : -- L2VC ID : 100 tagged MEP Number : 21 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 775 The ETH-test function is short for Ethernet test signal. ETH-test instances are performed for a unidirectional on-demand service or during an on-demand-service interruption to calculate parameters, including the maximum bandwidth, frame loss ratio, and bit error rate. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 776 The MA view is displayed. Run: map mpls l2vc vc-id { raw | tagged } The MA is associated with an L2VC. Run: mep mep-id A MEP is configured. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 777: Configuring Y.1731 Functions In Vpls Networking

    VPLS networking, the following performance monitoring functions defined by Y.1731 can be used to monitor links: Single-ended frame loss measurement Dual-ended frame loss measurement One-way frame delay measurement Two-way frame delay measurement Single-ended synthetic loss measurement (SLM) Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 778 MEP and a PW-based MEP. Y.1731 functions implemented by a PW-based MEP supports only one-way frame DM, two-way frame DM, single-ended SLM, and multicast MAC ping. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 779 Configuration Guide - VPN. l Completing CFM-related configurations and configuring the MEP type as Inward Configuring Y.1731 functions (AIS and Completing CFM-related configurations multicast MAC Ping) in VPLS networking Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 780 To collect performance statistics about a PW, do as follows on the PEs at both ends of the PW on the VPLS network. Procedure Step 1 Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Step 2 Run: cfm md md-name The MD view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 781 The MD view is displayed. Run: ma ma-name The MA view is displayed. Run: map vsi vsi-name The MA is bound to a VSI. Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 782 RMEP to receive LMMs. The LMM reception function is configured on the device. On the transmitting device of a PW where single-ended frame loss measurement will be implemented, run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 783 The MA is bound to a VLAN. – On the PE, run: map vsivsi-name The MA is bound to a VSI. Run: mep mep-id Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 784 Run the loss-measure single-ended send mep mep-id [ mac mac- scenario address | remote-mep mep-id ] interval interval count count-value command to enable single-ended frame loss measurement on the AC side. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 785 The y1731 pm-mode enable and y1731_record-upload commands are mutually exclusive. Run: cfm md md-name The MD view is displayed. Run: ma ma-name The MA view is displayed. Run: map vsi vsi-name Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 786 2. Run the loss-measure single-ended receive test-id test-id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs. On the transmitting device of a PW where proactive single-ended frame loss measurement will be implemented, run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 787 Currently, you can check the configuration of single-ended frame loss measurement in VPLS networking by using the NMS that matches the current device version. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view the statistics about single-ended frame loss. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 788 HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type single-loss md md1 ma ma1 peer-ip 2.2.2.2 Latest single-ended loss statistics: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Index Local-loss Local-loss ratio Remote-loss Remote-loss ratio -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50.0000% 75.0000% 50.0000% 75.0000% 50.0000% 75.0000%...
  • Page 789 NOTE Currently, you can check the configuration of dual-ended frame loss measurement in VPLS networking by using the NMS that matches the current device version. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 790 HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - Reliability 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view statistics about dual-ended frame loss. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type dual-loss md md1 ma ma1 Latest dual-ended loss statistics: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Index Local-loss...
  • Page 791 The CCM transmission function is enabled. This command can be configured only on an interface-based MEP. Run: remote-mep ccm-receive [ mep-id mep-id ] enable The CCM reception function is enabled. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 792 Performance statistics collection based on a specified test instance: 1. Run: test-id test-id A test instance is configured. 2. Run: delay-measure one-way send test-id test-id On-demand one-way frame delay measurement is configured for a PW. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 793 The MA view is displayed. Perform the following steps on the devices where the MEPs reside: – On the CE, run: map vlan vlan-id The MA is bound to a VLAN. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 794 The 1DM frame reception function is enabled. Point-to- 1. Run: multipoint test-id test-id A test instance is configured. 2. Run: delay-measure one-way receive test-id test-id The 1DM frame reception function is enabled. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 795 Performance management (PM) to manage Y.1731 proactive performance statistics is enabled. PM saves the statistics to generated statistics files and then sends the files to the NMS. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 796 The remote MEP ID is configured. Run: mep ccm-send enable The CCM transmission function is enabled. Run: remote-mep ccm-receive [ mep-id mep-id ] enable The CCM reception function is enabled. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 797 Performance statistics collection based on a specified test instance: 1. Run: test-id test-id A test instance is configured. 2. Run: delay-measure one-way continual send test-id test-id Proactive one-way frame delay measurement is configured for a Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 798 NMS that matches the current device version. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view statistics about the delay in unidirectional frame transmission. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type oneway-delay md md1 ma ma1 Latest one-way delay statistics: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------...
  • Page 799 The MA view is displayed. Run: map vsi vsi-name The MA is bound to a VSI. Table 8-59 lists MEP settings in various networking environments. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 800 Performance statistics collection based on a specified test instance: 1. Run: test-id test-id A test instance is configured. 2. Run: delay-measure two-way receive test-id test-id The DMM reception function is configured on the device. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 801 PWs on a PBB VPLS network. Perform the following steps to verify that CFM is disabled on a PBB VPLS network: – Run the vsi vsi-name command to enter the I-VSI view. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 802 } ] creates a PW Run: based MEP mep mep-id mep-id peer-ip peer-ip [ vc-id vc-id ] [ mac mac-address ] { ouward | inward } Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 803 The DMM reception function is configured on the device. On the transmitting device on a PW where proactive two-way frame delay measurement will be implemented, run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 804 NMS that matches the current device version. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view statistics about the delay in bidirectional frame transmission. <HUAWEI>display y1731 statistic-type twoway-delay md md1 ma ma1 Latest two-way delay statistics: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Index...
  • Page 805 The MD view is displayed. Run: ma ma-name The MA view is displayed. Run: map vsi vsi-name The MA is bound to a VSI. Configure a MEP according to Table 8-65. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 806 Perform the following steps on the devices at both ends of an AC where single- ended on-demand SLM will be implemented: Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 807 The MEP is enabled to send SLM frames. Configure single-ended proactive SLM. Perform the following steps on the devices at both ends of a PW where single-ended proactive SLM will be implemented: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 808 An RMEP is specified. Run: mep ccm-send enable The MEP is enabled to send CCMs. This command can be configured only on an interface-based MEP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 809 [ count count ] command on the MEP that has been enabled to send SLM frames. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command. The command output shows statistics for single- ended SLM. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type single-synthetic-loss test-id 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Index L-send R-send L-recv Unack...
  • Page 810 MD of a higher level from sending alarms to the NMS. NOTE Millisecond-level CC cannot be performed for the link between the CEs configured with alarm suppression. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 811 By default, AIS does not monitor any interface. (Optional) Run: ais interval interval-value The interval at which AIS packets are sent is set. By default, AIS packets are sent at an interval of 1s. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 812 NMS after receiving an AIS packet. Run: mep alarm disable Disables the alarm reporting function of a specific alarm indication signal (AIS). By default, the alarm reporting function is enabled. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 813 MEP in the current MA, you are recommended to run the ping mac multicast command to configure multicast MAC ping. Perform the following steps on each edge device in an MA: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 814 The test process repeats until a maximum bandwidth is found when no packets are dropped in a test. In addition, check for bit errors on MEP2 that receives test packets. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 815 } ] | [ 8021p 8021p-value ] | [ packet-size packet-size-value ] ] The MEP is enabled to send test packets. (Optional) Run: eth-test stop mep mep-id Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 816: Configuring Y.1731 Functions In Vlan Networking

    Multicast MAC ping Figure 8-58 Typical Y.1731 deployment scenario Services Access Metro Core Infrastructure BFD for PW/LSP Maintenance Y.1731 CFM/Y.1731 Service Maintenance CFM/Y.1731 Subscriber Maintenance Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 817 Before configuring Y.1731 functions in VLAN networking, complete the following tasks: Complete VLAN-related configurations on the peer MEPs. Data Preparation To configure Y.1731 functions in VLAN networking, you need the following data. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 818 Figure 8-60 Networking diagram of configuring AIS in VLAN networking AIS packets AIS packets VLAN VLAN/QinQ VLAN/QinQ MD2 Level 3 MD1 Level 6 Procedure Step 1 Perform the following steps on a PE: Run: system-view Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 819 Step 2 Perform the following steps on a CE: Run: system-view The system view is displayed. Run: cfm md md-name The MD view is displayed. Run: ma ma-name The MA view is displayed. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 820 <CE>display cfm ma md md1 ma ma1The total number of MAs is 1 The total number of MAs is 1 MD Name : md2 MD Name Format : string Level Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 821 [ -c count [ -t timeout ] | -t timeout -c count ] Multicast MAC ping is configured. By default, three multicast LBMs are sent and the timeout period for waiting for an LBR is 5s. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 822 The MA view is displayed. Run: map vlan vlan-id The MA is bound to a VLAN. Run: mep mep-id The MEP is configured. Run: remote-mep mep-id mep-id Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 823 1. Run the test-id test-id command to configure a test instance for a scenario specific RMEP. 2. Run the loss-measure single-ended send test-id test-id command to enable on-demand single-ended frame loss measurement on a Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 824 The MA view is displayed. Run: mapvlanvlan-id The MA is bound to a VLAN. Run: mep mep-id The MEP is configured. Run: remote-mep mep-id mep-id Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 825 2. Run the loss-measure single-ended receive test-id test-id command to enable the RMEP to receive LMMs. On the transmitting device on a link where proactive single-ended frame loss measurement will be implemented, run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 826 After completing the configuration, run the display y1731 statistic-type scenario single-loss test-id test-id [ count count-value ] command on the PW- or AC- side MEP that initiates single-ended frame loss measurement and verify the configuration. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 827 Currently, you can check the configuration of single-ended frame loss measurement in VLAN networking by using the NMS that matches the current device version. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command to view statistics about single-ended frame loss. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type single-loss md md1 ma ma1 Latest single-ended loss statistics: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------...
  • Page 828 Perform the following configuration on the MEP that sends SLM frames to initiate on-demand SLM: Run: loss-measure single-ended-synthetic send test-id test-id interval interval [ sending-count count-value ] [ timeout timeout ] Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 829 Run: remote-mep ccm-receive [ mep-id mep-id ] enable The RMEP is enabled to receive CCMs. (Optional) Run: loss-measure single-ended local-ratio-threshold mep-id mep-id upper- limit upper-limit lower-limit lower-limit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 830 [ count count ] command on the MEP that has been enabled to send SLM frames. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command. The command output shows statistics for single- ended SLM. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type single-synthetic-loss test-id 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Index L-send R-send L-recv Unack...
  • Page 831 MEP2 receives. If MEP1 sends more packets than MEP2 receives, some packets have been dropped. Then MEP1 is configured to use the bisection method to Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 832 The MA is associated with a VLAN. Run: mep mep-id A MEP is configured. Run: eth-test enable The ETH-test function is enabled. By default, the ETH-test function is disabled. Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 833: Clearing Y.1731 Statistics

    Run the reset y1731 statistic-type single-loss md md-name ma ma-name [ peer-ip peer- ip [ vc-id vc-id ] ] [ 8021p { 8021p-value } &<1-3> ] command in the user view. Clear statistics about point-to-multipoint single-ended frame loss measurement. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 834: Deleting Y.1731 Eth-Test Statistics

    Networking Requirements With the increasing popularization and wide application of the Internet, various value-added services such as IPTV, video conferencing, and VoIP services are widely deployed. Link Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 835 Configure the interval at which LM messages are sent and the number of times when on- demand LM messages are sent. Procedure Step 1 Configure on-demand single-ended frame loss measurement for the PW between the PEs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 836 Configure a VLL connection. Configure a VLL connection between PE1 and PE2. The configuration details are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VLL Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this configuration example.
  • Page 837 Proactive single-ended frame loss measurement can be configured to continuously monitor the performance of a PW. Cancel the configuration of the LMM reception function on PE2. [PE2] cfm md md1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 838 Minimum Remote-loss : Minimum Remote-loss Ratio : 75.0000% ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 vlan batch 2 cfm version standard cfm enable interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 839 4 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 outward mep ccm-send mep-id 4 enable remote-mep mep-id 3 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 3 enable loss-measure single-ended receive mep 4 return Configuration file of PE2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 840 Monitoring the unidirectional delay over mobile bearer links allows the providers to respond quickly to video service quality deterioration. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 841 Configure a VPLS connection. Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2. The detailed configurations are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VPLS Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this example.
  • Page 842 CKey NKey StpEnable PwIndex Interface Name GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 State Last Up Time : 2010/10/12 14:18:39 Total Up Time : 0 days, 1 hours, 2 minutes, 44 seconds **PW Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 843 [PE1-md-md1] quit # Configure PE2. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname PE2 [PE2] cfm enable [PE2] cfm version standard [PE2] cfm md md1 [PE2-md-md1] ma ma1 [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] map vsi ldp1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 844 Average Remote-loss Ratio : 75.0000% Maximum Remote-loss : Maximum Remote-loss Ratio : 75.0000% Minimum Remote-loss : Minimum Remote-loss Ratio : 75.0000% ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 845 1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 inward mep ccm-send mep-id 1 enable remote-mep mep-id 2 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 2 enable ma ma2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 846 Example for Configuring Dual-ended Frame Loss Measurement in VLL Networking This section provides an example showing how to configure dual-ended frame loss measurement in VLL networking. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 847 Configure the interval at which LM messages are sent. Procedure Step 1 Configure dual-ended frame loss measurement for the PW between the PEs. Configure a VLL connection. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 848 8 Ethernet OAM Configuration Configure a VLL connection between PE1 and PE2. The configuration details are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VLL Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this configuration example.
  • Page 849 Maximum Remote-loss : Maximum Remote-loss Ratio : 50.0000% Minimum Remote-loss : Minimum Remote-loss Ratio : 0.0000% ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of CE1 sysname CE1 vlan batch 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 850 2 enable loss-measure dual-ended continual mep 1 remote-mep 2 ma ma2 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep-id 4 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 outward mep ccm-send mep-id 4 enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 851 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 inward mep ccm-send mep-id 2 enable remote-mep mep-id 1 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 1 enable loss-measure dual-ended continual mep 2 remote-mep 1 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 852 Configure the names of the MD and MA between PE1 and PE2 and between CE1 and PE1.. Configure a VLAN ID on CE interfaces for collecting AC-side packet statistics. Configure the interval at which LM messages are sent. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 853 Configure a VPLS connection. Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2. The detailed configurations are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VPLS Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this example.
  • Page 854 IEEE Standard 802.1ag-2007. Create an MD named md1 and an MA named ma1, and bind the MA to the VSI. # Configure PE1. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 855 0.0000% 0.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% 50.0000% ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 856 1 peer 2.2.2.2 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 vlan-type dot1q 1 l2 binding vsi ldp1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 857 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.0 ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 858 Figure 8-66 Networking diagram for configuring Y.1731 function on a VLL networking GE1/0/2 GE1/0/2 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 User User Network Network Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 859 Configure a VLL connection. Configure a VLL connection between PE1 and PE2. The configuration details are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VLL Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this configuration example.
  • Page 860 <PE2> display y1731 statistic-type oneway-delay md md1 ma ma1 Latest one-way delay statistics: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Index Delay(usec) Delay variation(usec) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 861 10000 10000 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Average delay(usec) : 10000 Average delay variation(usec) : Maximum delay(usec) : 10000 Maximum delay variation(usec) : Minimum delay(usec) : 10000 Minimum delay variation(usec) : Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 862 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 cfm md md1 ma ma1 map mpls l2vc 2 tagged mep mep-id 1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 inward mep ccm-send mep-id 1 enable remote-mep mep-id 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 863 Example for Configuring One-way Frame Delay Measurement in VPLS Networking This section provides an example showing how to configure one-way frame delay measurement in VPLS networking. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 864 Configure a VLAN ID on CE interfaces for collecting AC-side packet statistics. Configure the interval at which 1DM messages are sent and the number of times when 1DM messages are sent. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 865 Configure a VPLS connection. Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2. The detailed configurations are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VPLS Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this example.
  • Page 866 IEEE Standard 802.1ag-2007. Create an MD named md1 and an MA named ma1, and bind the MA to the VSI. # Configure PE1. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 867 <PE2> display y1731 statistic-type oneway-delay md md1 ma ma1 peer-ip 1.1.1.1 Latest one-way delay statistics: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Index Delay(usec) Delay variation(usec) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 40000 30000 10000 30000 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 868 GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 vlan-type dot1q 2 mpls l2vc 2.2.2.2 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp interface LoopBack0 ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 869 2 tagged mep mep-id 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 inward mep ccm-send mep-id 2 enable remote-mep mep-id 1 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 1 enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 870 ID of a VLAN to which CE interfaces belong Names of the MD and MA on CE1 and CE2 Interval between 1DM messages and number of detection times in on-demand OAM mode Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 871 [CE1] cfm md md3 [CE1-md-md3] ma ma3 [CE1-md-md3-ma-ma3] delay-measure one-way send mep mep-id 3 remote-mep 4 interval 1000 count 20 [CE1-md-md3-ma-ma3] quit [CE1-md-md3] quit Verify the configuration. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 872 # After completing the configuration, run the display y1731 statistic-type oneway-delay md md3 ma ma3 command to view actual on-demand one-way frame delay measurements on CE2. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type oneway-delay md md3 ma ma3 Latest one-way delay statistics: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------...
  • Page 873 -1797843 -1797846 -1797843 -1797852 -1797734 -1797844 -1797832 -1797854 -1797830 -1797844 -1803127 5283 -1797832 5295 -1797824 -1802946 5122 -1797833 5113 -1797829 -1797825 -1797818 -1797820 -1797820 -1797815 -1797796 -1797828 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 874 44254 -1797770 -1797771 -1797715 -1797773 -1797763 -1797787 -1797761 -1797761 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Average delay(usec) : -1796758 Average delay variation(usec) : 2805 Maximum delay(usec) : -1753516 Maximum delay variation(usec) : Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 875 Example for Configuring Two-way Frame Delay Measurement in VLL Networking This section provides an example showing how to configure two-way frame delay measurement in VLL networking. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 876 Configure a VLAN ID on CE interfaces for collecting AC-side packet statistics. Configure the interval at which DMM messages are sent and the number of times when on-demand DMM messages are sent. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 877 Configure a VLL connection. Configure a VLL connection between PE1 and PE2. The configuration details are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VLL Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this configuration example.
  • Page 878 Proactive two-way frame delay measurement can be configured to continuously monitor the performance of a PW. Configure the DMM reception function on PE2. # Configure PE2. [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] delay-measure two-way receive mep 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 879 3 enable remote-mep mep-id 4 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 4 enable return Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1 mpls mpls l2vpn Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 880 1 peer 1.1.1.1 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 vlan-type dot1q 2 mpls l2vc 1.1.1.1 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls ldp Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 881 Figure 8-70 Networking diagram for configuring Y.1731 functions in VPLS networking GE1/0/2 GE1/0/2 VPLS GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 User User Network Network Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 882 Configure a VPLS connection. Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2. The detailed configurations are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VPLS Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this example.
  • Page 883 *Peer Ip Address 2.2.2.2 PW State Local VC Label 1025 Remote VC Label 1025 PW Type label Tunnel ID 0x800003 Broadcast Tunnel ID 0x800003 Broad BackupTunnel ID Ckey Nkey Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 884 Enable on-demand two-way frame delay measurement for the PW on the VPLS network. # Configure PE1. [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] delay-measure two-way send mep 1 remote-mep 2 interval 1000 count 20 peer-ip 2.2.2.2 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] quit [PE1-md-md1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 885 3 enable remote-mep mep-id 4 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 4 enable return Configuration file of PE1 sysname PE1 cfm version standard cfm enable mpls lsr-id 1.1.1.1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 886 1 peer 1.1.1.1 mpls ldp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 vlan-type dot1q 2 mpls l2vc 1.1.1.1 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 887 Figure 8-71 Networking diagram for configuring Y.1731 function on a VLAN networking GE1/0/2 GE1/0/2 VLAN GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1 User User Network Network Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 888 [CE2-md-md3-ma-ma3] mep mep-id 4 interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 outward [CE2-md-md3-ma-ma3] mep ccm-send mep-id 4 enable [CE2-md-md3-ma-ma3] remote-mep mep-id 3 [CE2-md-md3-ma-ma3] remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 3 enable Enable CE2 to receive DMMs. # Configure CE2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 889 # After completing the configuration, run the display y1731 statistic-type twoway-delay md md3 ma ma3 command to view actual proactive two-way frame delay measurements on CE2. <HUAWEI> display y1731 statistic-type twoway-delay md md3 ma ma3 Latest two-way delay statistics: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright ©...
  • Page 890 2 cfm md md3 ma ma3 map vlan 2 mep mep-id 4 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 outward mep ccm-send mep-id 4 enable Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 891 To complete the configuration, you need the following data: Layer 2 virtual circuit (L2VC) ID Names of the maintenance domain (MD) and maintenance association (MA) in which CE1, PE1, and PE2 reside Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 892 Step 1 Configure single-ended on-demand SLM on a PW between PEs. Establish a VLL. Establish a VLL between PE1 and PE2. For configuration details, see "VLL Configuration" in HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or Configuration Files in this section.
  • Page 893 : 2013/04/15 10:04:26 VC total up time : 2 days, 21 hours, 25 minutes, 20 seconds CKey NKey PW redundancy mode AdminPw interface AdminPw link state Diffserv Mode Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 894 [PE1-md-md1] quit Verify the configuration. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command on PE1 to view statistics about single- ended on-demand SLM. <PE1>display y1731 statistic-type single-synthetic-loss test-id 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 895 Run the display y1731 statistic-type command on PE1 to view statistics about single- ended proactive SLM. <PE1> display y1731 statistic-type single-synthetic-loss test-id 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Index L-send R-send L-recv Unack L-loss R-loss L-loss-ratio R-loss- ratio ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1016 0.0000% 0.0000% Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 896 10.1.1.24 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls interface Eth- Trunk2 interface Eth- Trunk2.1 vlan-type dot1q mpls l2vc 10.1.1.25 10001 interface Ethernet0/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 10.137.131.24 255.255.254.0 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 897 2 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 2 enable test-id 1 mep 1 remote-mep 2 loss-measure single-ended-synthetic continual send test-id 1 interval 1000 return PE2 configuration file sysname PE2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 898 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown eth-trunk undo interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown ip address 192.168.1.4 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls interface NULL0 interface LoopBack0 ip address 10.1.1.25 255.255.255.255 ospf opaque-capability enable area Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 899 This configuration allows the carrier to immediately adjust the network in case of voice quality deterioration. Figure 8-73 Single-ended synthetic frame LM in VPLS networking User Network VPLS User GE1/0/2 Network GE1/0/1 User Network GE1/0/2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 900 Step 1 Configure single-ended on-demand SLM on a PW between PEs. Configure a VPLS. Configure a VPLS between PE1 and PE2. For configuration details, see "VPLS Configuration" in HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or Configuration Files in this section.
  • Page 901 **PW Information: *Peer Ip Address 10.1.1.24 PW State Local VC Label Remote VC Label PW Type label Tunnel ID 0x25f Broadcast Tunnel ID 0x25f Broad BackupTunnel ID Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 902 300 [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] quit [PE2-md-md1] quit Enable PE1 to send SLM frames. # Configure PE1. [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] loss-measure single-ended-synthetic send test-id 1 interval 1000 sending-count 10 time-out 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 903 [PE1-md-md1] quit Verify the configuration. Run the display y1731 statistic-type command on PE1 to view statistics about single- ended proactive SLM. <PE1> display y1731 statistic-type single-synthetic-loss test-id 1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 904 PE1 FTP server enable y1731 pm-mode enable enable mpls lsr-id 10.1.1.24 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls interface Eth- Trunk2 interface Eth- Trunk2.1 vlan-type dot1q l2 binding vsi ethoam Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 905 1 enable remote-mep mep-id 2 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 2 enable test-id 1 mep 1 remote-mep 2 loss-measure single-ended-synthetic continual send test-id 1 interval Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 906 10.137.131.25 255.255.254.0 interface GigabitEthernet0/1/0 undo shutdown eth-trunk undo interface GigabitEthernet0/2/2 undo shutdown ip address 192.168.1.4 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls interface NULL0 interface LoopBack0 ip address 10.1.1.25 255.255.255.255 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 907 CE1 and CE2. To monitor network performance in real time, the carrier can configure single- ended SLM on the VLAN. This configuration allows the carrier to immediately adjust the network in case of voice quality deterioration. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 908 [CE1-md-md3-ma-ma3] remote-mep mep-id 4 [CE1-md-md3-ma-ma3] remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 4 enable [CE2-md-md3-ma-ma3] test-id 1 mep 3 remote-mep 4 # Configure CE2. <HUAWEI> system-view [HUAWEI] sysname CE2 [CE2] vlan 2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 909 Maximum Local-loss Maximum Local-loss Ratio 0.0000% Minimum Local-loss Minimum Local-loss Ratio 0.0000% Average Remote-loss : Average Remote-loss Ratio : 0.0000% Maximum Remote-loss : Maximum Remote-loss Ratio : 0.0000% Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 910 Average Remote-loss Ratio : 0.0000% Maximum Remote-loss : Maximum Remote-loss Ratio : 0.0000% Minimum Remote-loss : Minimum Remote-loss Ratio : 0.0000% ----End Configuration Files CE1 configuration file sysname CE1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 911 Then MEP1 is configured to use the bisection method to continue the test and send test packets at a lower rate. The bisection method is used to send test Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 912 NOTE l When VLAN networking is used, configure a VLAN between PE1 and PE2. For configuration details, see the section "VLAN Configuration" in HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access. l Configure a VPLS connection between PE1 and PE2. For configuration details, see the section "VPLS Configuration"...
  • Page 913 Run the display y1731 statistic-type eth-test command on PE2 to view test results. <PE2>display y1731 statistic-type eth-test md md1 ma ma1 mep 2 SrcMAC RcvPackets ErrBitPackets ErrSeqPackets ErrCrcPackets 0011-0101-0000 9208312 ----End Configuration Files PE1 configuration file Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 914 PE2 configuration file sysname enable mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3 mpls mpls l2vpn mpls cfm md map mpls l2vc 201 tagged mep mep-id 1 interface GigabitEthernet Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 915 Add the PEs to an MD, add each PE and its attached CE to an MD, and ensure that the level of the MD to which the PEs belong is lower than that to which each PE and its attached CE belong. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 916 In the case of VLAN networking, configure the VLAN between PE1 and PE2. The configuration details are not provided. For details, see the chapter "VLAN Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/ 40E Router Configuration Guide - LAN Access and MAN Access or configuration files in this configuration example.
  • Page 917 Step 3 Set the MEP type as inward on the AC-side interface of each PE (in VLAN networking, set the MEP type on the AC-side interface as outward). # Configure PE1. [PE1] cfm md md1 [PE1-md-md1] ma ma1 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep mep-id 31 interface gigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 inward Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 918 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] ais enable [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] ais link-status interface gigabitEthernet1/0/2 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] ais level 6 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] ais interval 1 [PE1-md-md1-ma-ma1] ais vlan vid 10 mep 31 [PE1-md-md1] quit # Configure PE2. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 919 The total number of MAs is 1 MD Name : md2 MD Name Format : string Level MIP Create-type : none SenderID TLV-type : Defer MA Name : ma2 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 920 100 tagged mep mep-id 31 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 inward mep ccm-send enable remote-mep mep-id 32 remote-mep ccm-receive enable ais enable ais link-status interface gigabitEthernet1/0/2 ais level 6 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 921 1.1.1.1 remote-ip 1.1.1.1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 vlan-type dot1q 10 mpls l2vc 1.1.1.1 100 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 undo shutdown ip address 10.2.1.2 255.255.255.252 mpls Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 922 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 undo shutdown portswitch port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 cfm md md2 level 6 ma ma2 map mpls vlan 10 mep mep-id 62 interface gigabitEthernet1/0/1 outward Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 923 PEs to change priorities of packets or re-classify the packets. This allows flexible frame loss or delay measurement on PWs. Figure 8-77 Network diagram for Y.1731 on a VLL GE1/0/2 GE1/0/2 GE1/0/1.1 GE1/0/1.1 User User Network Network Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 924 Step 1 Map VLAN 802.1p priorities to QoS CoS values and colors. For the configuration procedure, see Configuring Priority Mapping for VLAN Packets in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - QoS. For information on configurations, see the configuration files.
  • Page 925 Step 2 Map MPLS EXP field values to QoS CoS values and colors. For the configuration procedure, see Configuring Priority Mapping for MPLS Packets in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - QoS. For information about configurations, see the configuration files.
  • Page 926 Step 3 Configure a VLL connection. Configure a VLL connection between PE1 and PE2. The configuration details are not provided here. For details, see the chapter "VLL Configuration" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide - VPN or configuration files in this configuration example.
  • Page 927 [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep mep-id 2 interface gigabitethernet1/0/1.1 inward [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep mep-id 1 [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] mep ccm-send mep-id 2 enable [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 1 enable [PE2-md-md1-ma-ma1] quit [PE2-md-md1] quit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 928 8021p-inbound 6 phb ef green 8021p-inbound 7 phb be green 8021p-outbound af2 green map 3 8021p-outbound af3 green map 4 8021p-outbound af4 green map 5 8021p-outbound ef green map 6 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 929 30000 8021p 0 return Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 diffserv domain AC 8021p-inbound 1 phb be green 8021p-inbound 2 phb be green 8021p-inbound 3 phb af2 green Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 930 2 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1.1 inward mep ccm-send mep-id 2 enable remote-mep mep-id 1 remote-mep ccm-receive mep-id 1 enable loss-measure single-ended receive mep 2 8021p 0 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 931: Mpls-Tp Oam Configuration

    MPLS-TP OAM. 9.7 Configuration Examples This section describes the typical application scenarios of MPLS-TP OAM, networking requirements, configuration roadmap, and data preparation, and provides related configuration files. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 932: Introduction

    Use ME1 and ME2 shown in Figure 9-1 as an example: – ME1 consists of two MEPs only. – ME2 consists of two MEPs and two MIPs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 933: Mpls-Tp Oam Features Supported By The Ne80E/40E

    MPLS-TP OAM provides the performance monitoring and fault detection functions. Fault Management As shown in Table 9-1, MPLS-TP OAM supports the link fault detection and alarm suppression functions. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 934: Configuring Mpls-Tp Oam For A Section

    9-3, MPLS-TP OAM can be configured to monitor the three sections on the LSP, and the MPLS-TP OAM functions listed in Table 9-3 can be performed for the sections. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 935 Setting up the sections on an LSP Data Preparation To configure MPLS-TP OAM for a section, you need the following data. Data MEG name Name of the tunnel interface bound to the ME Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 936: Creating An Me And Binding It To A Section In An Lsp

    Step 4 Run: me link interface interface-type interface-number peer-ip peer-ip mep-id mep-id remote-mep-id remote-mep-id An ME is created and bound to a section on an LSP. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 937: Optional) Configuring Cc And Cv For Sections On An Lsp

    – 3.3 ms: 300 frames are sent per second. This interval is recommended in protection switching. – 10 ms: 100 frames are sent per second. – 100 ms: 10 frames are sent per second. This interval is recommended in performance monitoring. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 938: Optional) Configuring Lb For Sections On An Lsp

    Step 1 Run: ping meg meg-name [ -c count-value | -t timeout-value | { mip ttl ttl-number { node-id node-id-value | mip-id mip-id } [ if-num if-number-value ] } ] [ request-tlv ] Connectivity of an MPLS-TP link is checked. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 939: Optional) Configuring Frame Dm For Sections On An Lsp

    Running the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type delay- measure two-way command displays statistics about two-way delay and delay jitters. Applicat On-demand monitoring On-demand monitoring Proactive monitoring Proactive monitoring scenario Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 940 – Run the delay-measure two-way [ interval interval-value | count count-value | exp exp- value | two-time-stamp ] command to enable two-way on-demand frame DM. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 941: Optional) Enabling Rdi Of A Section

    After MPLS-TP OAM functions are configured for sections on an LSP, performance statistics and fault detection information can be queried. Prerequisites MPLS-TP OAM functions for sections on an LSP have been configured. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 942 Run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type command to check MPLS- TP OAM performance statistics. ----End Example Run the display mpls-tp oam current-alarm command to view alarm information about a MEG. <HUAWEI> display mpls-tp oam current-alarm meg test Alarm Name Start Time Meg Name Sended SD1 near-end SD1-NEAR 2011-01-24 10:24:41.410 test...

  • Page 943: Configuring Mpls-Tp Oam For An Lsp

    : dLOC -------------------------------------------------- Run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type command to view one-way delay statistics obtained using MPLS-TP OAM. <HUAWEI> display mpls-tp oam meg test statistic-type delay-measure one-way One-way delay measure statistics Index delay(us) delay variation(us)

  • Page 944: Before You Start

    LB: checks the continuous connectivity between the ingress LER and egress LER of a bidirectional LSP based on requirements. Check results will be directly displayed on a terminal. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 945: Creating An Me And Binding It To A Tunnel Interface

    (Optional) Interval between AIS PDU transmissions and priority of AIS PDUs 9.3.2 Creating an ME and Binding It to a Tunnel Interface This section describes how to create an ME and bind it to a bidirectional LSP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 946 Step 2 Run: mpls-tp meg meg-name A MEG is created, and the MEG view is displayed. Step 3 Run: me te interface interface-type interface-number mep-id mep-id remote-mep-id remote- mep-id Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 947: Optional) Configuring Cc And Cv For An Lsp

    Ensure that the same CCM transmission interval is set on the MEP and RMEP; otherwise, an alarm will be generated. l To configure the interval between CCM transmissions, run: cc interval interval-value CCM transmission intervals and their application scenarios are as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 948: Optional) Configuring Lb For An Lsp

    Commands can be run to trigger LB, and LB packets are used to check the following items: Availability of the remote device Round-trip delay in communication between two MEPs Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 949: Optional) Configuring Lm For An Lsp

    Running the display mpls-tp oam meg meg- name statistic-type lost-measure single- ended command can query single-ended packet loss statistics. Applicat On-demand monitoring Proactive monitoring Proactive monitoring scenario Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 950 – 3.3 ms: 300 frames are sent per second. This interval is recommended in protection switching. – 100 ms: 10 frames are sent per second. This interval is recommended in performance monitoring. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 951: Optional) Configuring Dm For An Lsp

    (DMMs) to its RMEP and receives Delay Measurement Replies (DMRs) from the RMEP to carry out two-way DM. The differences between one-way DM and two-way DM are listed in Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 952 MEP to its RMEP. – If the delay-measure one-way command has been run on the RMEP, run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type delay-measure one-way command on Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 953: Checking The Configurations

    Run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type command to check MPLS- TP OAM performance statistics. ----End Example Run the display mpls-tp oam current-alarm command to view alarm information about a MEG. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 954 : SD1-NEAR, SD1-FAR, SD2-NEAR, SD2-FAR -------------------------------------------------- Run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type command to view one-way delay statistics obtained using MPLS-TP OAM. <HUAWEI> display mpls-tp oam meg test statistic-type delay-measure one-way One-way delay measure statistics Index delay(us) delay variation(us)

  • Page 955: Configuring Mpls-Tp Oam For A Pw

    Run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type command to view dual-ended packet loss statistics obtained using MPLS-TP OAM. <HUAWEI> display mpls-tp oam meg test statistic-type lost-measure dual-ended Dual-end loss measurement statistics: Index Near-end lost frames Loss ratio Far-end lost frames Loss ratio 12.50%...
  • Page 956 T-PEs of a PW built over a bidirectional LSP. Pre-configuration Tasks Before configuring MPLS-TP OAM for a PW, complete the following tasks: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 957: Creating An Me And Binding It To A Pw

    Specifies an MPLS-TP OAM detection mode. The default mode is standard OAM detection. Step 3 (Optional) Run: mpls-tp channel-type { 0x7ffa | 0x8902 } Specifies the associated channel header (ACH) label value. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 958: Optional) Configuring Cc And Cv For A Pw

    Continuity check (CV) and connectivity verification (CV) are two different MPLS-TP OAM functions. CC checks loss of continuity (LOC) defects between two MEPs in a MEG. CV is used Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 959 – 100 ms: 10 frames are sent per second. This interval is recommended in performance monitoring. – 1000 ms: 1 frame is sent per second. This interval is recommended in fault management. – 10000 ms: 6 frames are sent per minute. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 960: Optional) Configuring Lb (To Be Performed At A Specified Time) For A Pw

    [ -c count-value | -t timeout-value | { mip ttl ttl-number { node-id node-id-value | mip-id mip-id } [ if-num if-number-value ] } ] [ request-tlv ] Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 961: Optional) Configuring Frame Lm For A Pw

    Applicat On-demand monitoring Proactive monitoring Proactive monitoring scenario The procedure for configuring single-ended or dual-ended frame LM is as follows: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 962 – 1000 ms: One frame is sent per second. This interval is recommended in fault management. (Optional) Run the cc exp exp-value command to configure the priority of CCMs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 963: Optional) Configuring Frame Dm For A Pw

    (DMMs) to its RMEP and receives Delay Measurement Replies (DMRs) from the RMEP to perform two-way frame DM. The differences between one-way and two-way frame DM functions are listed in Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 964 DM as needed: – If the delay-measure one-way command has been run on the MEP, run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type delay-measure one-way command on Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 965: Optional) Enabling Rdi For A Pw

    (NMS), run the undo rdi disable command on an MEP to enable RDI. Perform the following steps on an MEP: Procedure Step 1 Run: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 966: Checking The Configurations

    Run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type command to check MPLS- TP OAM performance statistics. ----End Example Run the display mpls-tp oam current-alarm command to view alarm information about a MEG. <HUAWEI> display mpls-tp oam current-alarm meg test Alarm Name Start Time Meg Name Sended SD1 near-end SD1-NEAR 2011-01-24 10:24:41.410 test...
  • Page 967 Alarm Indicate : no alarm -------------------------------------------------- Run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type command to view one-way delay statistics obtained using MPLS-TP OAM. <HUAWEI> display mpls-tp oam meg test statistic-type delay-measure one-way One-way delay measure statistics Index delay(us) delay variation(us)

  • Page 968: Configuring Mpls-Tp Oam On An L2+L3 Network

    Run the display mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type command to view dual-ended packet loss statistics obtained using MPLS-TP OAM. <HUAWEI> display mpls-tp oam meg test statistic-type lost-measure dual-ended Dual-end loss measurement statistics: Index Near-end lost frames Loss ratio Far-end lost frames Loss ratio 12.50%...
  • Page 969 Before configuring MPLS-TP OAM on an L2+L3 network, configure the L2+L3 network. Data Preparation To configure MPLS-TP OAM on an L2+L3 network, you need the following data: Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 970: Configuring An Me Instance

    Run: mpls-tp meg meg-name A MEG is created, and the MEG view is displayed. Run: me ip mep-id mepid-value interface interface-type interface-number l3uni [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 971: Configuring Lb On An L2+L3 Network

    If the network speed is too slow, set a larger value for timeout-value, which specifies the period to wait for a Reply packet. ----End 9.5.5 Checking the Configurations After MPLS-TP OAM is configured on an L2+L3 network, check performance statistics. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 972 Run the display mpls-tp oam meg command to view MEG information on the MEP. ----End Example Run the display mpls-tp oam me command to view information about MEs in a MEG. <HUAWEI> display mpls-tp oam me brief --------------------------------------------------------------- ME-Index MEG-Name...

  • Page 973: Maintaining Mpls-Tp Oam

    Run the reset mpls-tp oam meg meg-name statistic-type { lost-measure { single- ended | dual-ended } | delay-measure { one-way | two-way } command to delete MPLS- TP OAM statistics. ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 974: Monitoring Mpls-Tp Oam Status

    LSRA and LSRC: LSRA and LSRC serve as MEPs. LSRB serves as a MIP. Configure CC and CV on the MEPs. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 975 To complete the configuration, you need the following data: MEG name Name of the TE tunnel bound to the ME Interval between CCM transmissions and priority of CCMs Procedure Step 1 Configure a bidirectional LSP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 976 9 MPLS-TP OAM Configuration For details about the bidirectional LSP that is built based on LSRs, see "Configuring a Static Bidirectional LSP" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide-MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configuration example. Step 2 Create an ME and bind it to a bidirectional LSP.
  • Page 977 Tunnel1/0/0 mep-id 1 remote-mep-id 2 cc interval 100 cc exp 6 cc send enable cc receive enable return Configuration file of LSRB Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 978 LoopBack1 tunnel-protocol mpls te destination 1.1.1.1 mpls te signal-protocol cr-static mpls te tunnel-id 200 mpls te passive-tunnel mpls te binding bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress lsp1 mpls te commit Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 979: Example For Configuring Lb For An Lsp

    2.1.1.1/24 2.1.1.2/24 3.2.1.1/24 3.2.1.2/24 LSRA LSRB LSRC Configuration Roadmap The configuration roadmap is as follows: Create an ME and bind it to a bidirectional LSP. Enable LB. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 980 Step 1 Configure a bidirectional LSP. For details about the bidirectional LSP built based on LSRs, see "Configuring a Static Bidirectional LSP" in the <HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide-MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configuration example. Step 2 Create an ME and bind it to a bidirectional LSP.
  • Page 981 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 interface LoopBack1 ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255 ip route-static 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 2.1.1.1 ip route-static 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 3.2.1.2 return Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 982: Example For Configuring Lm For An Lsp

    The number of dropped packets is the difference between the number of packets sent by the ingress node and the number of packets received by the egress node on a P2P LSP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 983 Step 1 Configure a bidirectional LSP. For details about how to configure a bidirectional LSP between T-PEs, see "Configuring a Static Bidirectional LSP" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide-MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configuration example.
  • Page 984 Max far-end lost frames:10,frame loss ratio:12.50% Min far-end lost frames:10,frame loss ratio:12.50% Average far-end lost frames:10,frame loss ratio:12.50% ----End Configuration Files Configuration file of LSRA sysname LSRA Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 985 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 interface Pos2/0/0 undo shutdown ip address 3.2.1.1 255.255.255.0 mpls mpls te mpls te bandwidth max-reservable-bandwidth 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 986: Example For Configuring Dm For An Lsp

    As a connection-oriented packet switching technology, MPLS-TP is designed to convert a transport network from circuit switching to packet switching. The conversion aims to increase the transmission rate on the transport network. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 987 To complete the configuration, you need the following data: MEG name Name of the TE tunnel bound to the ME Procedure Step 1 Configure a bidirectional LSP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 988 9 MPLS-TP OAM Configuration For details about how to configure a bidirectional LSP between T-PEs, see "Configuring a Static Bidirectional LSP" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide-MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configuration example. Step 2 Create an ME and bind it to a bidirectional LSP.
  • Page 989 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 2.1.1.1 ip route-static 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 3.2.1.2 return Configuration file of LSRC sysname LSRC mpls lsr-id 3.3.3.3 mpls mpls te bidirectional static-cr-lsp egress lsp1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 990: Example For Configuring Cc And Cv For A Pw

    PW and finds that this packet is mistakenly transmitted by the PW, the device will report an alarm indicating a forwarding error. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 991 Step 1 Set up a PW over a bidirectional LSP. For details about how to set up a PW (between LSRs) based on a bidirectional LSP, see see "Configuring a PW" in the <HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide-MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configuration example.
  • Page 992 : vll-pw peer ip : 1.1.1.1 remote peer ip 2.2.2.2 vc id : 30000 vc type : VLAN state : UP alarm indicate : no alarm -------------------------------------------------- ----End Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 993 3.3.3.3 vc-id 30000 vc-type vlan mep-id 1 remote-mep-id 2 cc send enable cc receive enable return Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2 mpls Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 994 100000 mpls te bandwidth bc0 100000 interface POS1/0/0.1 vlan-type dot1q 1 mpls static-l2vc pw-template tpctoa 30000 transmit-vpn-label 101 receive-vpn- label 101 interface LoopBack1 ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 995: Example For Configuring Lb For A Pw

    MEPs. LM can be used to obtain an accurate packet loss ratios of the link between MEPs. Figure 9-12 Networking diagram for a PW built over a bidirectional LSP Loopback1 Loopback1 Loopback1 1.1.1.1/32 2.2.2.2/32 3.3.3.3/32 POS1/0/0 POS1/0/0 POS2/0/0 POS1/0/0 2.1.1.1/24 2.1.1.2/24 3.2.1.1/24 3.2.1.2/24 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 996 Step 1 Set up a PW over a bidirectional LSP. For details about how to set up a PW (between LSRs) based on a bidirectional LSP, see see "Configuring a PW" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide-MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configuration example.
  • Page 997 3.3.3.3 vc-id 30000 vc-type vlan mep-id 1 remote-mep-id 2 return Configuration file of PE2 sysname PE2 mpls lsr-id 2.2.2.2 mpls mpls te Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 998 POS1/0/0.1 vlan-type dot1q 1 mpls static-l2vc pw-template tpctoa 30000 transmit-vpn-label 101 receive-vpn- label 101 interface LoopBack1 ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255 interface Tunnel2/0/0 ip address unnumbered interface LoopBack1 Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

  • Page 999: Example For Configuring Lm For A Pw

    9-13, PE1, PE2, and PE3 are connected using a PW over a bidirectional LSP. The following deployment is performed to guarantee the connectivity between PE1 and PE3: PE1 and PE3 serve as MEPs. PE2 serves as a MIP. Issue 02 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
  • Page 1000 Step 1 Set up a PW over a bidirectional LSP. For details about how to set up a PW (between LSRs) based on a bidirectional LSP, see see "Configuring a PW" in the HUAWEI NetEngine80E/40E Router Configuration Guide-MPLS or information in the configuration files of this configuration example.

This manual is also suitable for:

Netengine40e

Table of Contents